NEC Server 5800 230Eh User Manual

N8100-1235F/1236F/1321F/1322F  
1287F/1288F/1352F  
N8100-1237F/1238F/1323F/1324F  
1290F/1291F/1293F  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
User's Guide  
3rd Edition  
5-2007  
ONL-4152dN-120Eh-100-99-0704  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep this manual at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.  
SAFETY INDICATIONS  
Follow the instructions in this manual for your safety to use the NEC Express server.  
Your server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring  
warnings, and preventive actions against such hazards.  
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them  
as well as described in this manual.  
In this manual or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of danger.  
These terms are defined as follows:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious  
WARNING  
personal injury if the instruction is ignored.  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury,  
including burns, or property damage if the instruction is ignored.  
CAUTION  
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols. The  
individual symbols are defined as follows:  
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard if the instruction is ignored.  
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)  
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a particular  
prohibited action. (Prohibited Action)  
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a  
mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)  
(Example)  
Symbol to draw attention  
Term indicating a degree of danger  
CAUTION  
High temperature.  
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as  
hard disk drives are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components  
fully cool down before installing/removing any component.  
Symbol indicating a prohibited  
action (may not always be  
indicated)  
Description of a danger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL AND WARNING LABELS  
Attentions  
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.  
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.  
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.  
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.  
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.  
Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam.  
Prohibited Actions  
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire  
may be caused.  
Mandatory Action  
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be  
caused.  
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified. Make sure to follow  
the instruction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help  
Momentary voltage drop prevention:  
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a  
momentary voltage drop, an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
NEC ESMPRO, NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and NEC EXPRESSSCOPE are trademarks of NEC Corporation.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
LSI Logic, LSI Logic Logo Design, MegaRAID, MegaRAID Storage Manager, and Power Console Plus are  
registered trademarks or trademarks of LSI Corporation.  
Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
ROM-DOS is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. of the United States.  
AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other  
countries.  
Adobe, Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States.  
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of  
their respective trademark owners.  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions stands for Microsoft® Windows® Server2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition  
Operating system and Microsoft® Windows® Server2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition operating system, or  
Microsoft® Windows® Server2003, Standard x64 Edition operating system and Microsoft® Windows®  
Server2003, Enterprise x64 Edition operating system. Windows Server 2003 stands for Microsoft®  
Windows® Server2003 R2, Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft® Windows® Server2003  
R2, Enterprise Edition operating system, or Microsoft® Windows® Server2003, Standard Edition operating  
system and Microsoft® Windows® Server2003, Enterprise Edition operating system.  
Windows Vista stands for Microsoft® Windows VistaBusiness operating system.  
Windows XP x64 Edition stands for Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition operating system.  
Windows XP stands for Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition operating system and Microsoft  
®
Windows XP Professional operating system. Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft Windows 2000 Server  
®
®
®
operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system, and Microsoft  
®
®
®
Windows 2000 Professional operating system. Windows NT stands for Microsoft Windows NT Server  
®
®
®
network operating system version 3.51/4.0 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system  
®
®
version 3.51/4.0. Windows Me stands for Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition operating system.  
®
®
Windows 98 stands for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system. Windows 95 stands for Microsoft  
®
®
®
Windows 95 operating system.  
®
Notes:  
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of  
NEC Corporation.  
(2) The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.  
(3) The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission  
of NEC Corporation.  
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. If you  
notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact the service representative  
where you purchased this product.  
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or  
consequential damages arising from the use of this manual regardless of Item (4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i
PREFACE  
Congratulations on the purchase of your NEC Express server.  
Purchase of this server is your assurance of receiving state-of-the-art, high quality hardware to meet  
your needs, both now and in the future.  
Read this User's Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the NEC Express server and  
appreciate its functions to the maximum extent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ii  
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE  
This manual is a guide for proper setup and use of your server.  
This manual also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise  
during setup or operation of your server.  
Keep this manual for future use.  
The following describes how to proceed with this manual.  
How to Use This Manual  
To aid you in finding information quickly, this manual contains the following information:  
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server  
includes information that needs attention to use the server. Make sure to read this chapter before  
setting up and using the server. It also includes requirements and advisory information for  
transfer and disposal of the server.  
Chapter 2 General Description  
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its  
components, handling of the floppy disk and DVD-ROM drives.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server  
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections, and power on your  
system.  
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server  
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS SETUP  
Utility and the RAID configuration utility, which is used to configure RAID drives in your system.  
This chapter also provides information on mother board jumper settings.  
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
describes how to install the operating system.  
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities  
describes how to install the utilities for the server. It also includes a description on using the  
attached "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM.  
Chapter 7 Maintenance  
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server.  
This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server.  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting  
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.  
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server  
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor, optional  
memory, optional add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power supply.  
Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagram  
includes cabling information for the SAS/SATA2 controller, 5.25-inch device, and the power  
supply.  
Appendix A Specification  
provides specifications for your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
iii  
Appendix B Other Precautions  
provides supplementary notes on using the server.  
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address  
provides a list of factory-set IRQs and I/O port addresses assigned.  
Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions without using Express  
Setup. Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 x64  
Editions. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003  
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup. Using the  
Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003. See Chapter 5 for  
details.  
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table  
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.  
Text Conventions  
The following conventions are used throughout this manual. For safety symbols, see "SAFETY  
INDICATIONS" provided earlier.  
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server  
IMPORTANT:  
Helpful and convenient piece of information  
NOTE:  
IN THE PACKAGE  
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make  
sure that you have everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any  
component missing or damaged, contact your service representative.  
Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need  
them to install an optional device or troubleshoot your server, as well as to set it up.  
Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the  
master disk in a designated place, and use its copy.  
Improper use of any provided CD-ROM may alter your system environment. If you find  
anything unclear, immediately ask your service representative for help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
iv  
CONTENTS  
Preface..............................................................................................................................................i  
About This User's Guide..................................................................................................................ii  
In the Package.................................................................................................................................iii  
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server........................................................................ 1-1  
Warning Labels.............................................................................................................................1-2  
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................1-3  
General.....................................................................................................................................1-3  
Power Supply and Power Cord Use .........................................................................................1-4  
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection....................................................................1-5  
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices...........................................................................1-6  
During Operation .....................................................................................................................1-7  
For Proper Operation....................................................................................................................1-8  
Transfer to Third Party .................................................................................................................1-9  
Disposal and Consumables.........................................................................................................1-10  
User Support...............................................................................................................................1-11  
Chapter 2 General Description..................................................................................... 2-1  
Overview ......................................................................................................................................2-2  
System Chassis .............................................................................................................................2-3  
Front View................................................................................................................................2-3  
Rear View.................................................................................................................................2-6  
Internal View............................................................................................................................2-8  
Mother Board..............................................................................................................................2-10  
Standard Features .......................................................................................................................2-12  
Power Supply .........................................................................................................................2-13  
Peripheral Bays ......................................................................................................................2-13  
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)..........................................................................2-13  
AC LINK Feature...................................................................................................................2-13  
Security ..................................................................................................................................2-13  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ....................................................................................................2-14  
NEC ESMPRO.......................................................................................................................2-14  
Off-line Maintenance Utility..................................................................................................2-15  
System Diagnostic Utility ......................................................................................................2-15  
Remote Management..............................................................................................................2-15  
Using Your Server.......................................................................................................................2-16  
POWER Switch......................................................................................................................2-16  
Power Off...............................................................................................................................2-20  
SLEEP Switch........................................................................................................................2-20  
DVD-ROM Drive...................................................................................................................2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server ................................................................................ 3-1  
Setup Flow....................................................................................................................................3-2  
Unpacking the System..................................................................................................................3-3  
Installing Optional Devices ..........................................................................................................3-3  
Selecting Server Site.....................................................................................................................3-4  
Connecting Peripheral Devices.....................................................................................................3-6  
Connecting Power Cord................................................................................................................3-8  
Turning On the Server ................................................................................................................3-10  
Installing Operating System .......................................................................................................3-12  
Installing Utilities .......................................................................................................................3-12  
Making Backup Copies of System Information..........................................................................3-12  
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server.............................................................................. 4-1  
System BIOS (BIOS Setup Utility) ..............................................................................................4-2  
Starting SETUP Utility.............................................................................................................4-3  
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage.....................................................................4-4  
Configuration Examples...........................................................................................................4-5  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions ...........................................................................................4-9  
Setup Utility................................................................................................................................4-31  
Running Setup Utility.............................................................................................................4-31  
Menu Tree ..............................................................................................................................4-33  
Operating Procedures for Setup Utility ..................................................................................4-34  
Add-in Card's BIOS....................................................................................................................4-44  
Configuring Mother Board Jumpers...........................................................................................4-45  
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup............................... 5-1  
About Express Setup ....................................................................................................................5-2  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003..................................................................................................5-3  
Installation Notice ....................................................................................................................5-3  
The Flow of Setup....................................................................................................................5-8  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.....................................................................................5-14  
Setting for Solving Problems .................................................................................................5-22  
Installing Maintenance Utilities .............................................................................................5-26  
Updating the System – Installing Service Pack –...................................................................5-27  
Making Backup Copies of System Information .....................................................................5-27  
Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass Storage Device ..........................................................5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities....................................................................... 6-1  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................6-2  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console.............................................6-4  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console ..........................................6-9  
Starting...................................................................................................................................6-10  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)..............................6-13  
Configuration Diskette Creator...................................................................................................6-14  
NEC ESMPRO ...........................................................................................................................6-18  
Functions and Features...........................................................................................................6-18  
Web-based Promise Array Manager ...........................................................................................6-19  
MegaRAID Storage Manager (Server) .......................................................................................6-19  
Setup with Express Setup.......................................................................................................6-19  
Manual Setup .........................................................................................................................6-19  
MegaRAID Storage Manager (Management PC).......................................................................6-19  
Power Console Plus....................................................................................................................6-20  
Major Functions .....................................................................................................................6-20  
Components............................................................................................................................6-20  
Server Setup ...........................................................................................................................6-22  
Management PC Setup...........................................................................................................6-23  
NEC DianaScope........................................................................................................................6-24  
Chapter 7 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 7-1  
Making Backup Copies ................................................................................................................7-1  
Cleaning........................................................................................................................................7-2  
Cleaning the Server..................................................................................................................7-3  
Cleaning the Interior.................................................................................................................7-4  
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse.................................................................................................7-5  
Cleaning Disc...........................................................................................................................7-6  
System Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................7-7  
Test Items.................................................................................................................................7-7  
Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics...................................................................................7-8  
Relocating/Storing The Server....................................................................................................7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting........................................................................................... 8-1  
System Viewers ............................................................................................................................8-2  
Lamps ...........................................................................................................................................8-3  
POWER/SLEEP Lamp.............................................................................................................8-4  
Access Lamps...........................................................................................................................8-4  
DISK Access Lamp..................................................................................................................8-4  
LINK/ACT Lamp.....................................................................................................................8-4  
1000/100/10 Lamp ...................................................................................................................8-5  
100/10 Lamp ............................................................................................................................8-5  
Hard Disk Drive Lamp.............................................................................................................8-5  
Error Messages .............................................................................................................................8-7  
Error Messages after Power-on ................................................................................................8-7  
POST Error Messages ..............................................................................................................8-8  
Beep Codes.............................................................................................................................8-11  
Solving Problems........................................................................................................................8-12  
Problems with NEC Express Server.......................................................................................8-12  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ...............................................................8-16  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2...............................................................................8-17  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 ....................................................................................8-18  
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ............................................................................8-21  
Problems with Express Setup.................................................................................................8-22  
Problems with Disk Array Configuration...............................................................................8-25  
Problems with Master Control Menu .....................................................................................8-26  
Collecting Event Log .............................................................................................................8-26  
Collect Configuration Information.........................................................................................8-27  
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information ......................................................................8-27  
Memory Dump.......................................................................................................................8-27  
Off-line Maintenance Utility ......................................................................................................8-28  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility...............................................................................8-28  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility ...............................................................................8-29  
Resetting the Server....................................................................................................................8-30  
Forced Shutdown........................................................................................................................8-30  
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server ................................................................................ 9-1  
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................9-2  
Static Precautions .........................................................................................................................9-3  
Preparing for Installation and Removal........................................................................................9-4  
Installation or Removal Procedure ...............................................................................................9-5  
Left Side Cover ........................................................................................................................9-5  
Front Mask ...............................................................................................................................9-8  
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive (SAS Model).................................................................................9-10  
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive (SATA Model)...............................................................................9-17  
PCI Board...............................................................................................................................9-23  
DIMM ....................................................................................................................................9-33  
Processor (CPU).....................................................................................................................9-42  
File Device .............................................................................................................................9-48  
Additional HDD Cage............................................................................................................9-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagrams....................................................................... 10-1  
Interface Cables..........................................................................................................................10-2  
Addition of Hard Disk Drive..................................................................................................10-2  
Connection of Disk Array Controller N8103-91 (SAS) .........................................................10-4  
Connection of Disk Array Controller N8103-101 (SATA2)...................................................10-6  
Connection of 5.25-inch Device.............................................................................................10-9  
Power Cables............................................................................................................................10-11  
Appendix A Specifications............................................................................................A-1  
Appendix B Other Precautions.....................................................................................B-1  
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ......................................................................B-1  
Server Management Software .................................................................................................B-1  
Floppy Disk.............................................................................................................................B-1  
DVD/CD-ROM.......................................................................................................................B-4  
Tape Media..............................................................................................................................B-4  
Keyboard.................................................................................................................................B-5  
Mouse......................................................................................................................................B-6  
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address.........................................................................C-1  
Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions........................................D-1  
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.................................................................D-1  
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER......................................................D-1  
Installing Service Pack............................................................................................................D-2  
Updating System .....................................................................................................................D-2  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ...........................D-2  
Manual Installation when N8103-80F Keeps Connection.......................................................D-2  
Mounting MO Device .............................................................................................................D-2  
About Removable Media ........................................................................................................D-2  
Creating Partition Size ............................................................................................................D-3  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.............................................................................D-4  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"..D-4  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation...........................................................D-6  
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives...............................................................................D-8  
Updating the System .............................................................................................................D-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ................................................................................D-11  
PROSet..................................................................................................................................D-11  
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)........................................D-12  
Network Driver .....................................................................................................................D-13  
Re-install the Network Driver...............................................................................................D-14  
Re-install the Optional Network Board Driver......................................................................D-15  
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver...............................................................D-15  
Graphics Accelerator Driver..................................................................................................D-16  
Optional Network Board Driver............................................................................................D-18  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75)......................................................................D-19  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-95)......................................................................D-19  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (N8103-80F) ..........................................................D-19  
About Windows Activation ...................................................................................................D-20  
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information).....................................................D-22  
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003 ..............................................................E-1  
Before Installing Windows Server 2003...................................................................................... E-1  
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...................................................... E-1  
Installing Service Pack............................................................................................................ E-2  
Updating System ..................................................................................................................... E-2  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ........................... E-2  
Manual Installation when N8103-80F Keeps Connection....................................................... E-2  
Mounting MO Device ............................................................................................................. E-2  
About Removable Media ........................................................................................................ E-2  
Application of Service Pack.................................................................................................... E-2  
Creating Partition Size ............................................................................................................ E-3  
Installing Windows Server 2003.................................................................................................. E-4  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" ..................... E-4  
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ................................................................................ E-6  
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives............................................................................... E-9  
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist................................... E-11  
Updating the System ............................................................................................................. E-12  
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ................................................................................ E-13  
PROSet.................................................................................................................................. E-13  
Network Driver ..................................................................................................................... E-14  
Re-install the Network Driver............................................................................................... E-15  
Graphics Accelerator Driver.................................................................................................. E-16  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75/95)................................................................. E-18  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (N8103-80F) .......................................................... E-18  
Notes of N8103-75................................................................................................................ E-19  
About Windows Activation ................................................................................................... E-20  
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File....................................... E-22  
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information)..................................................... E-23  
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table ...................................................... F-1  
Hardware................................................................................................................................. F-1  
Software .................................................................................................................................. F-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Notes on Using Your Server  
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1-2 Notes on Using Your Server  
WARNING LABELS  
The warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to  
inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not intentionally  
remove or damage any of the labels.)  
If you find any labels totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your service  
representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-3  
SAFETY NOTES  
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure proper  
and safe use of the server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.  
General  
WARNING  
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly  
affect human lives.  
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices  
concerning human lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and  
devices, aeronautics and space devices, transportation facilities and devices;  
and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. NEC assumes no liability  
for any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the  
server has been used in the above conditions.  
Do not use the server if any smoke, odor, or noise is present.  
If smoke, odor, or noise is present, immediately turn off the server and  
disconnect the power plug from the outlet, then contact your service  
representative. Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire.  
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.  
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or  
openings in the floppy disk or DVD-ROM drive. Doing so may cause an  
electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Do not access inside your server for a service or replacement of the internal  
components.  
The service representative can only install or remove the internal components  
and optional devices. To avoid personal injury or electrical shock, contact  
your service representative when your need to install/remove the internal  
components.  
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.  
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper  
clips) enter the server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric  
shock, a fire, or a failure of the server. When such things accidentally enter  
the server, immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your service  
representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4 Notes on Using Your Server  
Power Supply and Power Cord Use  
WARNING  
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to  
follow this warning may cause an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
Plug in to a proper power source.  
Use a proper wall outlet. Use of an improper power source may cause a fire  
or a power leak.  
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a cord that  
does not meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord  
and cause a fire.  
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of  
connections.  
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may  
cause a fire.  
Do not pull the cable when disconnecting it.  
When disconnecting the cable from the device, hold the cable connector and  
pull it straight out. Pulling the cable out by the cable portion or giving  
mechanical stress to the connector could damage the cables and connectors  
to result in an electrical shock hazard or a fire.  
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect  
contact) may cause a fire. Heat will also be generated if condensation is  
formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug, increasing the possibility  
of fire.  
Use the authorized power cord only.  
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized  
power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.  
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a  
damaged cord.  
Do not stretch the cord harness.  
Do not pinch the power cord.  
Do not bend the power cord.  
Keep chemicals away from the power cord.  
Do not twist the power cord.  
Do not place any object on the power cord.  
Do not bundle power cords.  
Do not alter, modify, or repair the power cord.  
Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents.  
Do not use any damaged power cord. (Replace a damaged power cord  
with a new one of the same specifications. Ask your service representative  
for replacement.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-5  
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection  
WARNING  
Disconnect the power cord(s) before installing or removing the server.  
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power cord(s) from a  
power outlet before installing/removing the server. All voltage is removed only  
when the power cords are unplugged.  
CAUTION  
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
Your server weighs max 20 kg (depending on its hardware configuration).  
Carrying the server only by yourself may strain your back. Hold the server  
firmly by its bottom with at least two or more people. Do not hold the front  
mask to lift the server. The front mask may be disengaged from the server,  
causing personal injury.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than  
specified in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire.  
a dusty place  
a humid place such as near a boiler  
a place exposed to direct sunlight  
an unstable place  
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged  
to a power source.  
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power  
outlet before installing/removing any optional internal device or  
connecting/disconnecting any interface cable to/from the server. If the server  
is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source, touching an  
internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire  
resulted from a short circuit.  
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.  
Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and  
connector before connecting a cable. Using an authorized cable or  
connecting a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit,  
resulting in a fire.  
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.  
Do not use any damaged cable connector.  
Do not step on the cable.  
Do not place any object on the cable.  
Do not use the server with loose cable connections.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6 Notes on Using Your Server  
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion  
other than described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may  
cause an electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server.  
Do not look into the DVD-ROM drive.  
A laser beam used in the DVD-ROM drive is harmful to the eyes. Do not look  
into or insert a mirror into the drive while the drive is powered. If a laser beam  
is caught in your eyes, you may lose your eyesight (the laser beam is  
invisible).  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Your server contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Placing  
the lithium close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion.  
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium  
battery, contact your service representative. Do not disassemble the server to  
replace or recharge the battery by yourself.  
Disconnect the power plug before accessing inside the server, or connecting  
the peripherals.  
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a  
power outlet before cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices.  
Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a  
power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off-powered.  
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug  
with a dry cloth. Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty  
plug, which may cause a fire.  
CAUTION  
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.  
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as  
hard disk drives are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components  
fully cool down before installing/removing any component.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Always install a board firmly. An incompletely installed board may cause a  
contact failure, resulting in smoking or fire.  
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.  
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with the protective  
cap to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards, when removing the power  
supply cable connector from the install devices, attach the protective cap to  
the connector. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric  
shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-7  
During Operation  
CAUTION  
Stay away from the fan.  
Keep your hand or hair away from the cooling fan on the rear of the server.  
Failure to follow this warning may get your hand or hair caught in the fan,  
resulting in injury.  
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.  
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet when a thunderstorm is  
approaching. If it starts thundering before you disconnect the power plug, do  
not touch any part of the server including the cables. Failure to follow this  
warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Keep animals away from the server.  
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.  
Do not leave the CD tray open.  
If dust gets on the lens of DVD-ROM drive, the drive may have problems  
reading your disks.  
Also, the CD tray may be broken by contacting any objects.  
Take off the headset before connection.  
To protect your ears, take off the headset before connecting it to the headset  
jack. Make sure that the volume is not extremely turned up before connection.  
Do not place any object on top of the server.  
The server may fall and cause property damage to the surroundings.  
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server.  
Turn off the cellular phone or pager. Radio interference may cause  
malfunctions of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8 Notes on Using Your Server  
FOR PROPER OPERATION  
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server. Use of the server ignoring the  
notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server.  
Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation. For details,  
see Chapter 3, "Setting Up Your Server."  
If the power cord supplied with your system is not compatible with the AC wall outlet in  
your region, contact your service representative to obtain a suitable power cord.  
Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the  
server and peripheral devices.  
Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting  
the floppy disk.  
When plugging the power cord to the system, you may experience 10 seconds delay from  
the time you press the POWER/SLEEP switch on the front panel. This is normal system  
operation.  
When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it back  
on. If the server is connected to the UPS, set at least 10 seconds delay in the power-on  
schedule.  
For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a disk with  
the CD drive is not guaranteed.  
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.  
Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 7 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning  
proactively prevents various failures of the server.  
Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is  
recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit.  
Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices  
may be physically installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as  
malfunctions of the server.  
NEC recommends you use NEC's genuine products. Some third-party products claim that  
they support the server. However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulted  
from use of such third-party products will be charged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-9  
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY  
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the  
server to a third party:  
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.  
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk drive  
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g.,  
customers' information or companies' management information) on the  
removed hard disk drive to any third parties.  
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or  
execute the "format" command of the operating system. However, the  
actual data remains written on the hard disk drive. Data not erased  
completely may be restored by special software and used for  
unexpected purposes.  
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available  
at stores) for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble  
explained above. For details on data erasure, ask your sales  
representative.  
Provided software  
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following  
requirements must be satisfied:  
All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be  
retained.  
Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each  
software application must be satisfied.  
Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before  
transferring the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10 Notes on Using Your Server  
DISPOSAL AND CONSUMABLES  
Dispose of the server, all the internal devices and DVD/CD-ROMs according to all  
national laws and regulations.  
IMPORTANT:  
For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the mother board of  
the server, consult with your service representative.  
It is the user's responsibility to completely erase or modify all the  
data stored in storage device such as hard disk drive so that the data  
cannot be restored.  
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and  
require replacement, such as fans, internal batteries, the internal DVD-ROM drive, the  
floppy disk drive, and the mouse. For stable operation of the server, NEC recommends  
you replace these components on a regular basis. Consult with your service representative  
for replacement or the product lives.  
WARNING  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Your server contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Placing the  
lithium or nickel cadmium battery close to a fire or in the water may cause an  
explosion.  
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery,  
contact your service representative. Do not disassemble the server to replace or  
recharge the battery by yourself.  
Mother board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Using Your Server 1-11  
USER SUPPORT  
Before Asking for Repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:  
1. Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.  
2. See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the  
recommended measure for it.  
3. Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.  
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, consult with your service  
representative immediately. Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on  
the display unit before consultation, which may provide a significant help to your service  
representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12 Notes on Using Your Server  
Advice for Health  
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become  
tired, which may cause disorders of your body. When you use a computer,  
observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired:  
Good Working Posture  
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a  
computer:  
You sit on a chair with your back straight.  
Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the  
keyboard.  
You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.  
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part  
of your body is under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are  
most relaxed.  
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you  
operate a display unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working  
posture may cause eye strain or poor eyesight.  
Adjustment of Display Unit Angles  
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and  
vertical angles. This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from  
reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy to see. You  
will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you will feel more tired  
than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal  
and vertical angles.  
Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast  
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The  
most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the  
working environment (well-lighted room or insufficient light). Adjust  
brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to see. An  
extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.  
Adjustment of Keyboard Angle  
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an  
angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate.  
The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and  
fingers.  
Cleaning of Equipment  
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a  
dusty screen. Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.  
Fatigue and Rest  
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
General Description  
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It  
includes names and functions of the components and features of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-2 General Description  
OVERVIEW  
Your server is a modular, multiprocessing server based on the Intel® Xeon® processor family. It is  
a solid performer and offers the latest technology. The combination of compute performance,  
memory capacity, and integrated I/O provides a high performance environment for many server  
market applications. These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small  
companies looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such a file and print services, e-mail, web  
access, web site server, etc. Your server is housed and available as a tower-based system.  
Front View  
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional memory, add-  
in boards and peripheral devices; tape devices, and hard disk drives. The server features the  
following major components.  
A high-performance Intel Xeon processor  
Up to 24GB of memory (using 4GB DIMMs)  
Minimum configuration is 1GB of memory  
Dual channel memory configuration  
Five integrated I/O expansion PCI slots for add-in boards (three PCI Express slots, one  
64-bit/100 MHz slot and one 32-bit/33 MHz slot)  
Onboard enhanced IDE interface controller  
Onboard SAS RAID controller  
Onboard 1000/100/10 network controller  
Four hard disk drive expansion bays  
Embedded PC-compatible support (serial, parallel, mouse, keyboard, USB, LAN, and  
video)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-3  
SYSTEM CHASSIS  
Names and functions of the components are shown below.  
Front View  
SAS Model  
Additional slot 1  
Additional slot 2  
1
2
11  
3
4
5
6
10  
7
9
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4 General Description  
SATA Model  
Additional slot 1  
Additional slot 2  
1
2
11  
3
4
5
6
10  
7
9
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-5  
1
2
Front mask  
The front mask protects the front face of the chassis.  
DVD-ROM drive  
The DVD-ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD-ROM or DVD-ROM.  
The drive is equipped with the following:  
Open/Close button to eject the tray  
Access lamp that indicates the disk access status (lights orange while being accessed)  
Emergency hole to forcibly eject the tray  
3
4
5.25-inch device bay  
Backup file device of 5.25-inch width such as DAT drive or MO drive may be installed in the  
5.25-inch device bay.  
A DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed in the bottom bay.  
To install a DVD-RAM drive or internal AIT (IDE), install it in the bottom bay. In this case, move  
the DVD-ROM drive to the additional slot 1 and connect it as a master drive.  
Disk access lamp (green)  
The disk access lamp is lit while the system accesses to an internal hard disk drive. If the  
internal hard disk drive is connected to the optional board, this lamp can be lit only when the  
LED cable provided with the server is connected.  
5
6
POWER/SLEEP lamp (green)  
Lights green when the server is powered on. Blinks green when the system is placed in the  
sleep mode.  
POWER/SLEEP switch  
The POWER/SLEEP switch is used to turn the power of the server ON/OFF. If you press this  
switch once, the power is turned on with the lamp going on green. If you press the switch  
again, the power is turned off.  
Some OS setting can provide the function of switching to the power saving (sleep) mode. If  
you press the POWER/SLEEP switch once after the setting, the system enters into the power  
saving mode. If you press the switch again, the system returns to the normal state.  
(Depending on installed optional boards, the function cannot be provided.)  
7
8
USB connectors  
The USB connectors are connected with devices accepting the USB interface.  
Stabilizer  
Use the stabilizers to prevent the server from falling down. Close the stabilizers when laying  
the server down.  
9
Hard disk drive bay  
The bay can contain hard disk drives.  
10 Release tabs (4 at an end of front mask)  
The release tabs are provided to unlock the front mask. Press the tabs to remove the front  
mask.  
11 3.5-inch floppy disk drive bay  
The bay can contain an internal USB floppy disk drive (option).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6 General Description  
Rear View  
5
4
1
2
6
7
11-1  
10  
8
10  
8
11-2  
10  
13  
12  
3
2
9
1
2
3
AC inlet  
The AC inlet is connected with the power cord.  
Fixing screws (2)  
Secures the left side cover.  
Cover lock plate  
Installing a theft prevention device  
protects the internal components of the  
workstation from being stolen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-7  
4
5
6
Mouse connector  
The mouse connector is connected with the mouse coming with the server.  
Keyboard connector  
The keyboard connector is connected with keyboard coming with the server.  
Serial port connector  
The serial port connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface. The  
server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector.  
7
8
Monitor connector  
The monitor connector is connected with the display unit.  
1000/100/10 lamp  
1000/100/10 lamp indicates the transfer rate of LAN port.  
9
100/10 lamp  
100/10 lamp indicates the transfer rate of management LAN port.  
LINK/ACT lamp  
10  
The LINK/ACT lamp shows the LAN access status.  
11 LAN connector  
The LAN connector is connected with a network system on LAN (1000BASE-T/100BASE-  
TX/10BASE-T). The value following the bold-faced number indicates the port number.  
12 USB connectors  
The USB connectors are connected with devices accepting the USB interface.  
13 Management LAN port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8 General Description  
Internal View  
SAS Model  
1
2
4
5-1  
6
7
3-2  
8
3-1  
5-2  
10  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-9  
SATA Model  
1
2
4
5-1  
6
7
3-2  
8
3-1  
5-2  
10  
9
1
2
3
Power supply unit  
Mother board  
Cooling fan  
3-1 Front  
3-2 Rear  
4
5
DIMMs  
CPU heat sink  
5-1 CPU 1  
5-2 CPU 2 (additional)  
DVD-ROM drive  
5.25-inch device bay  
6
7
A standard DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed in the bottom slot.  
Hard disk drive bay  
8
For SAS model, the HDD cage is factory installed.  
PCI guide rail  
9
10 3.5-inch hard disk drive (optional)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10 General Description  
MOTHER BOARD  
20  
2
4-1  
3
1-1  
19  
1-2  
4-2  
2
18  
5-5  
5-4  
6
7
4-5  
5-0 to 5-3  
4-4  
17 16 15  
13  
12-5 12-6 11 10  
12-1 to 12-4  
9
8
4-3  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-11  
1
Processor socket  
1-1 CPU1 socket  
1-2 CPU2 socket  
2
3
Power connectors  
DIMM sockets  
(DIMM #A-1, #A-2, #A-3, #B-1, #B-2, and #B-3 from bottom to top)  
Cooling fan connector  
4-1: CPU1 heat sink fan  
4-2: CPU2 heat sink fan  
4-3: Front fan  
4-4: Rear fan  
4-5: VR fan  
SAS connector  
4
5
(Not provided for SATA model. The last digit shows a channel number.)  
Connector for RAID5 activation key  
SAS SW RAID select jumper switch (Not provided for SATA model.)  
See Chapters 4 and 9 for switch setting.  
Disk LED connector  
6
7
8
9
USB port connector  
10  
11  
12  
USB device connector  
IDE connector  
Serial ATA connector  
(12-1 to 12-4 are not provided for SAS model. The last digit shows a channel number.)  
Lithium battery  
Switch/LED cable connector  
CMOS configuration jumper switch  
Serial port B connector (for option device)  
IPMB connctor  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
PCI board slots (#1 to #5 from top)  
18-1: PCIe ×4  
18-2: 64-bit/100MHz PCI-X  
18-3: PCIe ×8  
18-4: PCIe ×1 (connector: ×4)  
18-5: 32-bit/33MHz PCI  
19  
20  
Connector for external device  
Reserved  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12 General Description  
STANDARD FEATURES  
High performance  
Expandability  
Dual-Core IntelXeonProcessor  
High-speed 1000BASE-T/100BASE-  
TX/10BASE-T interface  
(1Gbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)  
High-speed disk access (SATA2)  
Dual channel memory configuration  
Large memory of up to 24GB  
(six 4GB DIMMs)  
USB interface (USB 2.0)  
Five integrated I/O expansion PCI slots  
- PCI Express (x8): 1 slot  
- PCI Express (x4): 1 slot  
- PCI Express (x1): 1 slot  
- PCI-X (64-bit/100 MHz): 1 slot  
- PCI bus (32-bit/33 MHz): 1 slot  
Serial ATA x6 channels  
(x2 channels for SAS model)  
Ultra ATA 100 x1 channel  
Up to two multi-processors  
Can be used as rack-mount type.  
(N81243-64F rack conversion kit is  
required.)  
High-reliability  
Many Available Features  
BIOS password feature  
Temperature detection  
El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no emulation  
mode) format support  
Cooling fan monitoring feature  
Internal voltage monitoring feature  
Memory monitoring feature (single-bit  
error correction/double-bit error detection)  
CPU/memory degradation feature  
Disk array (SATA2/SAS)  
Remote power-on feature  
AC-LINK feature  
Disk array (SATA)  
IPMI v2.0 compliant Baseboard  
Management Controller (BMC)  
Bus parity error detection  
Self-diagnosis  
Error notification  
Power On Self-Test (POST)  
Test and Diagnosis  
Management Utilities  
Easy and Fine Setup  
NEC ESMPRO  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
NEC DianaScope  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup  
utility)  
BIOS setup utility  
NEC EXPRESSSCOPE Engine  
Configuration Diskette Creator  
Power Saving Feature  
Sleep feature  
(available for Windows Server 2003)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-13  
Power Supply  
The system contains one auto-sensing 600-watt power supply at an operating frequency of 50/60  
Hz.  
The power supply is designed to comply with existing emission standards and provide sufficient  
power for a fully loaded system configuration.  
Peripheral Bays  
The system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. The chassis  
includes these peripheral bays:  
Three 5.25-inch file bays for installing 5.25-inch peripheral devices such as an optional  
tape drives. (A DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed.)  
The 3.5-inch device bays for installing up to four SATA or SAS hard disk drives.  
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)  
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet from  
the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.  
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for each submenu in the Power Management  
Setup of the Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)  
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER/SLEEP  
switch once to start the OS, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.  
Abnormal previous system shut-down  
No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power  
blackout, etc.)  
AC LINK Feature  
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the  
server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS  
to the server. The AC LINK feature can be enabled or disabled with Power Management Setup in  
the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)  
Security  
The BIOS setup utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental  
access to the system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is allowed only  
after the user enters the correct password(s). For example:  
Set and enable an administrative password.  
Set and enable a user password  
Check the user account when entering the BIOS setup utility or booting the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14 General Description  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The CD-ROM that comes with the server contains a setup utility called "NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER."  
The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are:  
To install the Operating System.  
"Express Setup" helps you to install the Windows Operating System. (See Chapter 5)  
To diagnose the system.  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes the System Diagnostics to check your server. (See  
Chapter 6)  
To create support disks.  
Use this function to create the support disks used to boot the utilities from the floppy disk,  
or the OEM floppy disk used for a manual installation of Windows. (See Chapter 6)  
To update the BIOS.  
Use this function to update the system BIOS or firmware of the server. (See Chapter 6)  
To update the Windows System*  
"Update Express5800 system" in Master Control Menu (Windows-based NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER feature) updates the several drivers of Microsoft Windows. (See  
Chapter 6)  
To install the utilities.  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes some management software for Windows (NEC  
ESMPRO, NEC DianaScope and so on) and maintenance utilities for DOS (System  
diagnostics, Off-line Maintenance Utility and so on).  
You can install the applications for Windows from Master Control Menu and install the  
utilities for DOS from Tools menu. (See Chapter 6)  
To read the online documents*  
You can refer to the online documents from Master Control Menu. (See Chapter 6)  
* These functions are available under the Windows system.  
NOTE: Some features among those listed above can be used from the  
remote computer via cross cable (COM), or LAN. See Chapter 6 for  
details.  
NEC ESMPRO  
The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the OS. The NEC ESMPRO  
includes the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and the NEC ESMPRO  
Agent for the NEC Express server.  
NOTE: For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO, system  
configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO, see Chapter 6.  
Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the OS you install.  
Ask your service representative for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-15  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for maintenance and fault analysis of the server. This  
utility is usually used by the service representative. See Chapter 8 for details.  
System Diagnostic Utility  
The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to detect  
hardware failures. See Chapter 7 for details.  
Remote Management  
The server may be monitored and managed via LAN/WAN by installing the optional Remote  
Management (N8115-03) and NEC DianaScope utility. To use the NEC DianaScope, a separately  
priced server license is required.  
The Remote Management performs the following:  
Monitoring of temperature, voltage, and fans  
Generation of SEL (system event log) at occurrence of hardware failure  
Monitoring of OS stall by using watchdog timer  
Notification after occurrence of OS stop error  
Remote management via LAN/WAN by using NEC DianaScope (e.g., resetting the server,  
power on/off, viewing System Event Log (SEL))  
NOTES:  
Notes on using Remote Management (N8115-03)  
Booting the server from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD by  
using the Remote Media function is not available.  
For the latest information about Remote Console/Remote Media  
function, visit our web site.  
The following functions are not supported in the command line  
interface of EXPRESSSCOPE Engine.  
Power state acquisition  
STATUS LED state acquisition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16 General Description  
USING YOUR SERVER  
This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as the  
floppy disk drive and the DVD-ROM drive. See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk, CD-  
ROM, and accessories including the keyboard and the mouse.  
POWER Switch  
Use the POWER/SLEEP switch to turn on/off the server.  
Power On  
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp lights in green.  
IMPORTANT:  
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a  
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), make sure that the power  
control device is powered.  
Do not turn off the server until characters appear on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-17  
POST  
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnostic program stored in the system memory.  
When you power on the server, the system automatically runs POST to check the mother board,  
ECC memory module, CPU module, keyboard, and mouse. POST also displays messages of the  
BIOS Setup utility, such as the start-up message, while in progress.  
With the factory setup of the server, the NEC logo appears on the display unit while POST is in  
progress. (To display the POST check results, press Esc.)  
You don't always need to check the POST check results. Check messages that POST displays when:  
you use the NEC Express server for the first time.  
the server appears to fail.  
the server beeps for many times between power-on and OS start-up.  
an error message appears on the display unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-18 General Description  
POST Execution Flow  
The following describes the progress of POST in the chronological order.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not power off the server while POST is in progress.  
Do not make key entries or perform mouse operations while POST  
is in progress.  
Some system configurations may display the message "Press Any  
Key" to prompt a key entry. This message is driven by BIOS of an  
installed optional board. Make sure to read the manual that comes  
with the optional board before any key entry.  
Powering on the server, after you installed or removed an optional  
PCI board or moved it to another slot, may display the message that  
indicates incorrect board configuration and suspend POST.  
In such a case, press F1 to continue POST. Board configuration can  
be made using the utility described later.  
1. After a few seconds from power-on, POST starts checking the memory. The count  
message of the basic and expansion memory appears at top left on the display unit screen.  
The memory check may takes a few minutes to complete depending on the memory size  
of the server. Also, it may take approximately one minute for the screen display to appear  
after rebooting the server.  
2. Some messages appear upon completion of the memory check. These messages appear to  
indicate that the system has detected the CPU, keyboard, and mouse.  
3. After a few seconds, POST displays the following message prompting you to launch the  
BIOS SETUP utility, stored in the system memory of the server. This message appears at  
bottom left on the screen.  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or Press <F12> to boot from Network  
Launch the BIOS setup utility when you need to change the settings to meet the  
requirements for the server. As long as the above message is not displayed with an error  
message, you don't have to launch the utility. (Ignore the message. POST will  
automatically proceed.)  
To launch the BIOS setup utility, press F2 while the above message is displayed. See  
Chapter 4 for setup and parameters.  
The server automatically restarts POST all over again when you exit the SETUP utility.  
4. If your server uses onboard SAS RAID feature, the following message is displayed on the  
screen to prompt you to run the utility.  
Press Ctrl-M to run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
Press Ctrl + M to run the utility. For detail explanation, see Chapter 4 for detail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-19  
5. If the POST detects the optional add-in card, it display the message prompting you to  
launch the add-in card BIOS configuration utility. (Ignore the message. POST will  
automatically proceed a few seconds later.)  
Refer to the manual that comes with the optional add-in card for detail.  
6. If you set a password using the BIOS SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears  
upon successful completion of POST.  
Up to three password entries will be accepted. Three incorrect password entries disable  
the server to boot. In such a case, turn off the power and wait about ten seconds before  
turning on to boot the server.  
IMPORTANT: Do not set a password before installing an OS.  
7. The OS starts when POST completes.  
POST Error Messages  
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen or emits beep  
code. See Chapter 8 for POST error codes.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before  
consulting with your service representative. Alarm messages are useful  
information for maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-20 General Description  
Power Off  
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to a  
UPS, refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the  
UPS.  
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the  
server.  
1. Shut down the OS.  
2. Press the POWER/SLEEP switch on the front of the server.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes out.  
3. Power off peripheral devices.  
NOTE: The standby function of Windows Server is not available. Do  
not select "Standby" in the Windows shutdown menu.  
SLEEP Switch  
The POWER/SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server (power-saving mode  
or sleep mode).  
Press the POWER/SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power-saving  
mode. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp blinks.) In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory  
data and the status of the previous operations.  
To resume the original state, press the POWER/SLEEP switch again. (It may take a little time to  
resume the original state.)  
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on  
the OS in use. (Available for Windows Server 2003.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-21  
DVD-ROM Drive  
The server is provided with the DVD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a disc.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not leave the tray ejected from the DVD-ROM drive.  
Take off the headphone before you plug in the headphone jack.  
Setting and Removing the Disc  
1. Make sure that the power of the server is on (with the POWER/SLEEP lamp being lit in  
green) before setting the disc on the DVD-ROM drive.  
2. Press the Open/Close button on the front of the DVD-ROM drive.  
The tray comes out.  
3. Put the disc on the tray carefully and securely with the character printed surface facing  
upward.  
4. Press the Open/Close button or gently push on the tray front.  
The tray is automatically retracted into the DVD-ROM drive.  
IMPORTANT: If a noisy sound in driving the DVD-ROM drive occurs  
after setting a disc, set it again correctly.  
To take out the disc from the DVD-ROM drive, press the Open/Close button in the similar way in  
setting the disc to make the tray go out. If the access LED is lit in orange, the disc is being accessed.  
Confirm that the access LED is not lit before pressing the Open/Close button.  
Your OS may have a command to eject the tray.  
When you have taken out the disc, retract the tray back in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-22 General Description  
When you fail to eject:  
When you fail to eject the tray with the Open/Close button and take out the disc from the server,  
follow the procedure below.  
1. Press the POWER switch to power off the server. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)  
2. Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length (a  
straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the emergency hole on the front  
of the DVD-ROM drive and gently push it in until the tray is ejected.  
Emergency hole  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.  
If the above procedure does not let you take out the DVD/CD-ROM,  
contact your service representative.  
3. Hold the tray and pull it out.  
4. Take out the disc.  
5. Push the tray back into position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Description 2-23  
Use of the Disc  
Keep the following notes in mind to use the disc for the server:  
For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a disk with  
the CD drive is not guaranteed.  
Do not drop the disc.  
Do not place anything on the disc or bend the disc.  
Do not attach any label onto the disc.  
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.  
Place the disc with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.  
Do not scratch the disc or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point pen.  
Keep the disc away from cigarette smoke.  
Do not leave the disc in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or  
close to a heater).  
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the disc, wipe the disc from its center to edge  
with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.  
Use the CD cleaner to clean the disc. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner.  
Keep the disc in a disc case when not in use.  
If the disc emits large noise in the DVD-ROM drive, remove the disc and insert it back  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-24 General Description  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Setting Up Your Server  
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step  
basis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3-2 Setting Up Your Server  
SETUP FLOW  
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.  
Unpacking the system  
Unpack the server and accessories from the shipping carton box.  
Installing optional devices  
If you have purchased any optional device for the server, see Chapter 9 to install it.  
Selecting the server site  
Select a suitable site for the server.  
Connecting peripheral devices  
Connect peripheral devices to the server.  
Connecting the power cord  
Connect the power cord to the server.  
Turning on the server  
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal  
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.  
Installing the operating system  
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5.  
Installing the utilities  
Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
See Chapter 6.  
Making backup copies of system information  
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system  
information.  
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after  
replacing the system board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-3  
UNPACKING THE SYSTEM  
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If the shipping  
boxes are damaged, note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for reference. After removing  
the contents of the containers, keep the cartons and the packing materials. If the contents appear  
damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a damage claim with the carrier immediately.  
INSTALLING OPTIONAL DEVICES  
To install any optional device, see Chapter 9, "Upgrading Your Server," for the installation  
procedure. Proceed to the next section if you have no optional devices to install.  
IMPORTANT: There are third-party products (memory modules, hard  
disk drives, etc.) available for the server in the markets. However, NEC  
recommends that you should use NEC products for stable operation.  
NEC assumes no liability for data errors and failures due to malfunction  
of the server resulted from installation of those third-party products.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4 Setting Up Your Server  
SELECTING SERVER SITE  
Read the following precautions before selecting a suitable site for your server. The following  
describes installation of the server and connections to the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
The following figure illustrates a site suitable for installing the server.  
Allow clearance of at least 150 mm in  
front of and behind the server.  
Close enough to connect the  
mouse and the display.  
Room that satisfies the  
following conditions: *  
<While operating>  
Temperature: 10 to 35ºC  
Install the server on  
a flat, rigid desk  
Humidity: 20 to 80%  
Temperature gradient: ±10ºC/h  
Atmosphere: 749 to 1040 hpa  
<While halting>  
Temperature: –10 to 55ºC  
Humidity: 10 to 80%  
Temperature gradient: ±15ºC/h  
Atmosphere: 749 to 1040 hpa  
The server must be  
fixed with stabilizers.  
Clean and tidy room  
100 to 120 Vac/200 to 240  
Vac parallel bi-polar wall  
power outlet with the  
ground line.  
* It is recommended that the server should be used in a room where  
temperature is in the range between 15 to 25ºC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-5  
When you have selected a server site, hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons and  
carry it to the site, then place it slowly and gently.  
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the server by its front mask to lift the  
server. The front mask may be disengaged and damage the server.  
Do not install the server in the following locations as it may cause malfunctions of the server.  
Places with drastic changes in temperature (e.g., near a heater, air conditioner, or  
refrigerator)  
Places with strong vibration  
Places with corrosive gas in presence, near chemicals, or with possibilities of chemicals  
sprayed over  
On a non-antistatic carpet  
Places with possibilities of falling objects  
Places where a power outlet that shares the ground line with another (especially the one to  
which a device with large power consumption is connected) must be used for the server  
Places near a device generating intense magnetic field (such as a TV, radio,  
broadcast/communication antenna, power transmission wire, and electromagnetic crane) is  
placed  
Places near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at power-on/power  
off of commercial power supply through a relay). If you must install the server close to  
such equipment, request your service representative for separate power cabling or noise  
filter installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6 Setting Up Your Server  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for wide variety of  
peripheral devices. The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for the server  
in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not use any damaged cable connector.  
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.  
Do not use the server with any loose interface connection.  
Do not step on the interface cable or place any heavy object on it.  
IMPORTANT:  
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection.  
Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will  
cause malfunctions and failures.  
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the  
server, consult with your service representative for availability of  
such a device or cable. Some third-party devices may not be used  
for the server.  
To connect the provided keyboard and mouse, plug their connectors  
to the server with the "" mark on the connectors facing right.  
Do not connect the serial ports with the telephone line directly.  
Do not connect any devices to the connectors not instructed in this  
subsection. Doing so could damage the device, your server, or both.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-7  
FRONT  
Device with the USB interface  
(e.g., terminal adapter)  
Mouse  
REAR  
Finally connect the  
power cord to the  
receptacle.  
Keyboard  
Device with the serial  
interface (e.g., modem)*  
Hub  
(multiport repeater)  
LAN ports  
(1000BASE-T/  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T)  
Display unit  
Device with the USB interface  
(e.g., terminal adapter)  
Management LAN port  
(100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)  
Hub  
(multiport repeater)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8 Setting Up Your Server  
CONNECTING POWER CORD  
Connect the provided power cord to the server.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages  
1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.  
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of  
connections.  
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.  
Use the authorized power cord only.  
1. Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the server.  
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-9  
NOTES:  
To connect the power cord from the server to an interruptive power  
supply (UPS), use service outlets on the rear of the UPS.  
Refer to the manual that comes with the UPS for details.  
Connect the battery  
connector when using  
UPS.  
Disconnect the connector  
when moving the UPS to  
relocate it.  
When the power cord from the server is connected to a UPS, change  
the BIOS SETUP utility of the server to link with power supply  
from the UPS.  
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" of the Server menu of the  
BIOS SETUP utility. See Chapter 4 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10 Setting Up Your Server  
TURNING ON THE SERVER  
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.  
IMPORTANT: Before turning on the server:  
Some optional boards require setups with the BIOS setup utility  
before installation. If the server has a PCI board with the PCI-to-  
PCI bridge installed, the BIOS setup utility is enabled to launch.  
Check on the board specifications to find out whether it requires  
pre-installation setups before actually installing the board.  
Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices  
require setups before proceeding to the next step.  
To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic  
board, install a desired OS to the server.  
1. Make sure all external devices, such as a video display, keyboard, and mouse have been  
connected, and the power cords are connected.  
2. Power on the video display and any other external devices.  
3. Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the DVD-ROM drive  
contains no bootable DVD/CD-ROM.  
4. Press the POWER/SLEEP switch.  
NOTES:  
If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the  
UPS, turn on the power control unit.  
Connect the power cord and wait a few seconds before pressing the  
POWER switch. The POWER/SLEEP switch does not work in a  
few seconds after connecting the power cord due to firmware start-  
up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Your Server 3-11  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on.  
In a few seconds, the NEC logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test (POST)  
begins.  
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard  
operation (Ctrl + Alt + Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets  
interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral devices, and boots the operating system (if  
installed). See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST.  
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating a  
fatal system error requiring immediate attention. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," for  
troubleshooting information.)  
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and  
test. Depending on the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to  
complete the memory test.  
NOTE: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen with the  
NEC logo screen. You can always change the NEC logo screen to the  
POST screen by pressing Tab. To change the start-up screen, use the  
BIOS setup utility. (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS setup utility  
stored in ROM on the mother board or on an installed option board.  
Start the BIOS setup utility appropriate to your system environment to change the CMOS Setup. For  
detail explanation on the BIOS setup utility for the server, see Chapter 4. For the BIOS utility for  
the option board, refer to the manual that comes with the option board.  
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off  
your system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12 Setting Up Your Server  
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM  
See Chapter 5 for installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003.  
To install the other operating system, contact your service representative.  
INSTALLING UTILITIES  
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 6 for details.  
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the  
server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information by the following process.  
1. Insert the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive and reboot  
the system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Configuring Your Server  
Configuration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration. You can configure  
your system, as well as option boards you may add to your system, using the BIOS Setup utility.  
Several unique system parameters are configured using the BIOS Setup utility, which is stored in  
the system FLASH memory.  
If your system has been factory configured, the BIOS Setup utility or RAID Configuration Utility  
do not need to be run unless you want to change the password or security features, add certain types  
of option boards or devices, or upgrade your mother board.  
This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters that are set by  
jumpers on the system board. However, these parameters do not usually require change.  
Use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to create the device driver diskettes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4-2 Configuring Your Server  
SYSTEM BIOS (BIOS SETUP UTILITY)  
The BIOS Setup utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility  
is pre-installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run.  
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the BIOS Setup utility and shipped in the  
best conditions. Thus, you don't need to use the BIOS Setup utility in most cases. However, you  
might wish to use the BIOS Setup utility in the cases described below.  
IMPORTANT:  
The BIOS Setup utility is intended for system administrator use  
only.  
The BIOS Setup utility allows you to set a password. The server is  
provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With  
the Supervisor password, you can view and change all system  
parameters of the BIOS Setup utility. With the User password,  
system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.  
Do not set any password before installing the OS.  
The server contains the latest version of the BIOS Setup utility.  
Dialog boxes appear on your BIOS Setup utility, thus, may differ  
from descriptions in this manual. If you find anything unclear, see  
the online help or ask your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-3  
Starting SETUP Utility  
A few seconds after powering on, the following message appears at bottom left on the screen.  
If NEC logo appears instead, press Esc.  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or Press <F12> to boot from Network  
Press F2 to start the BIOS Setup utility and display its Main menu.  
If you have previously set a password with the BIOS Setup utility, the password entry screen  
appears. Enter the password.  
Enter password:[  
]
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three  
consecutive times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.  
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password:  
Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and  
change all system parameters. With the User password, system  
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 Configuring Your Server  
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage  
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the BIOS Setup utility. These keys are also listed at  
the bottom of the menu screen.  
Indicates the current menu.  
Indicates there are submenus.  
Setup item  
menu  
Online  
help  
window  
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu  
Explanation of key functions menu  
Move cursor up and down. The cursor moves only to the settings  
that you can change.  
Cursor (, ):  
Move between menus.  
Cursor (, ):  
and +:  
Enter  
Esc  
F1:  
F9:  
Select the previous value (–) or the next value (+) for the field.  
Execute command or select ³ submenu.  
Exit the current menu and return to the previous menu.  
Get Help about an item. Press Esc to return to the previous menu.  
Load default configuration values for this menu.  
Save configuration values and exit.  
F10:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-5  
Configuration Examples  
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for  
system operations.  
Time and Date Settings  
You can also change the time and date settings via the operating system commands.  
Select [Main] - [System Time].  
Select [Main] - [System Date].  
Link with Management Software  
To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network  
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake On LAN/PME] - [Enabled].  
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Stay Off].  
Hard Disk Drive  
To check the hard disk drive status  
Select [Main] - [Primary IDE Master] and check the status indications.  
To configure the SW RAID (on-board) with SATA hard disk drives  
Select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA Controller Mode Option] -  
[Enhanced]. Then select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA RAID] -  
[Enabled], and configure the RAID drive.  
IMPORTANT: Be sure to set to [Enabled] after executing [Load  
Setup Defaults] or CMOS clear. Leaving this parameter as the factory-  
set value (Disabled) may destroy the data in hard disk drive.  
UPS  
To link power supply with the UPS  
To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS  
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Power On].  
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS  
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Stay Off].  
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER  
switch was used to power off  
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Last State].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6 Configuring Your Server  
Boot  
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server  
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.  
To control from the remote console  
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection] and set each item.  
Memory  
To check the installed memory (DIMM board) status  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] and check the status indications.  
The on-screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the mother board are  
associated as shown in the following figure.  
DIMM #B-3  
DIMM #B-2  
DIMM #B-1  
DIMM #A-3  
DIMM #A-2  
DIMM #A-1  
CPU #1  
CPU #2  
REAR  
FRONT  
Motherboard  
To clear the memory (DIMM board) error information  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.  
To run power-on memory test  
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Extended RAM Step] - [1MB] and  
reboot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-7  
CPU  
To check the installed CPU status  
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] and check the status indications.  
The on-screen processor numbers and socket locations on the motherboard are associated  
as shown in the figure on the previous page.  
To clear the CPU error information  
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] - [Processor Retest] – [Yes] and reboot.  
Keyboard  
To set Numlock  
Select [Advanced] - [Numlock] – [On]/[Off].  
Event Log  
To clear event logs  
Select [Server] - [Event Log Configuration] - [Clear all Event Logs], press Enter, and  
select [Yes].  
Security  
To set passwords on the BIOS  
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.  
Select [Security] - [Set User Password] and enter a password.  
Set Supervisor password first, then User password.  
External Devices  
To set up external devices  
Select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] and set up each device.  
Internal Devices  
To install the disk array controller board or SCSI controller board  
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n Option ROM] - [Enabled].  
n: slot number  
To clear the hardware configuration data (after installing/removing internal devices)  
Select [Advanced] - [Reset Configuration Data] - [Yes].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8 Configuring Your Server  
Saving the Configuration Data  
IMPORTANT: If the SATA hard disk drives are used in disk array  
configured with the on-board HostRAID, be sure to select [Advanced] -  
[Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA Controller Mode Option] -  
[Enhanced]. Then, select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] -  
[SATA RAID Enable] - [Enabled]. Leaving this parameter as the  
factory-set value (Disabled) may destroy the data in hard disk drive.  
To save the current configuration data  
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] or [Save Changes].  
To discard changes to the current configuration data  
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes] or [Discard Changes].  
To load the user-defined default  
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].  
To load the custom defaults  
Select [Exit] - [Load Custom Defaults].  
To save the custom defaults  
Select [Exit] - [Save Custom Defaults].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-9  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions  
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
Server  
Boot  
Exit  
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes available  
functions and parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.  
Main  
If BIOS SETUP is started, the Main menu appears first. If you select a menu item preceded by  
symbol ³ and press Enter, the appropriate submenu appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10 Configuring Your Server  
The items which can be set on the Main menu screen and their functions are described below.  
Option  
Parameter  
HH:MM:SS  
MM/DD/YYYY  
[Disabled]  
3 seconds  
6 seconds  
9 seconds  
12 seconds  
15 seconds  
21 seconds  
30 seconds  
Description  
Your Setting  
System Time  
System Date  
Hard Disk Pre-Delay  
Set the system time.  
Set the system date.  
Allows slower spin-up drives to  
come ready.  
Primary IDE Master  
Primary IDE Slave  
Secondary IDE Master  
Secondary IDE Slave  
Shows the information on the  
device connected to each  
channel on the submenu. If only  
one hard disk drive is connected  
to serial ATA channel, the  
information is displayed on area  
for Primary IDE.  
The settings of some items may  
be changed. However, leave the  
items as they are at the  
shipment.  
Processor Settings  
Language  
Shows the processor settings  
submenu. See the next page.  
Select which language BIOS  
displays.  
[English (US)]  
Français  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT: Check and adjust the system clock before the  
operation if any of the following conditions is applicable.  
After carriage of device  
After storage of device  
After the device is entered into the pause state under the  
environmental condition enduring device operation (temperature:  
10°C - 35°C, humidity: 20% - 80%)  
Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the  
system clock is installed in a system requiring high time precision, it is  
recommended to use a time server (NTP server).  
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of  
time in spite of adjustment, contact your service representative for  
maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-11  
Processor Settings  
If you select "Processor Settings" on the Main menu, the screen shown below appears.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Processor Retest  
Parameter  
[No]  
Yes  
Description  
Your Setting  
If you select [Yes], BIOS will clear  
historical processor status and retest all  
the processors on the next boot. This  
parameter is automatically reset to "No"  
at the next boot.  
Processor Speed  
Setting  
nnn GHz  
Displays clock speed for the processor.  
(View only)  
Processor 1  
CPUID  
Numeral (0Fxx)  
Disabled  
Not Installed  
Displays CPU ID for processor 1.  
"Disabled" indicates that the processor  
is defected.  
"Not Installed" indicates that no CPU is  
installed.  
(View only)  
Processor 1 L2  
Cache  
Displays L2 cache size for processor 1.  
Processor 2  
CPUID  
Numeral (0Fxx)  
Disabled  
Not Installed  
Displays CPU ID for processor 2.  
"Disabled" indicates that the processor  
is defected.  
"Not Installed" indicates that no CPU is  
installed.  
(View only)  
Processor 2 L2  
Cache  
Displays L2 cache size for processor 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Execute Disable  
Bit  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Description  
Displayed only when the CPU supports  
Execute Disable Bit.  
Your Setting  
Specify whether to enable or disable this  
feature.  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Intel(R)  
Virtualization Tech  
Specify whether to enable or disable the  
virtualization technology of Intel  
processor.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-13  
Advanced  
The Advanced menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of "Advanced."  
If you select a menu item preceded by symbol ³ and press Enter, the appropriate submenu appears.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Memory  
Displays submenu.  
Configuration  
PCI Configuration  
Peripheral  
Displays submenu.  
Displays submenu.  
Configuration  
Advanced Chipset  
Control  
Displays submenu.  
Boot-time  
Diagnostic Screen  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the power-on self-test  
(POST) running screen is displayed or not  
on booting. If disabled, the BIOS will display  
the NEC logo during POST. Press Esc to  
switch to the POST running screen.  
Reset  
Configuration Data  
[No]  
Yes  
Select "Yes" if you want to clear the system  
configuration data stored in POST. This  
parameter is automatically reset to "No" at  
the next boot.  
NumLock  
On  
[Off]  
Specify whether to enable or disable the  
Numlock feature at system start-up.  
Memory/Processor [Boot]  
Error  
Specify whether to stop POST execution if a  
memory or processor error was detected  
during POST.  
Halt  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14 Configuring Your Server  
Memory Configuration  
The following screen appears if you select "Memory Configuration" on the Advanced menu.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
System  
Memory  
Extended  
Memory  
Indicates the total capacity of the base  
memory. (View only)  
Indicates the total capacity of the memory  
available for OS. (View only)  
DIMM Group Normal  
#1 Status Disabled  
Indicates the current memory status. (View  
only)  
DIMM Group Not installed  
#2 Status  
"Normal" indicates that the memory devices  
operate normally.  
DIMM Group  
#3 Status  
"Disabled" indicates that one or more memory  
devices are defected.  
"Not Installed" indicates that no memory  
devices are installed.  
On-screen group numbers and DIMM  
slockets on mother board are associated as  
follows.  
Group #1: DIMM #A-1, #B-1  
Group #2: DIMM #A-2, #B-2  
Group #3: DIMM #A-3, #B-3  
Each group is composed of two DIMMs of  
interleave type.  
Memory  
Retest  
[No]  
Yes  
If you select [Yes], BIOS will clear historical  
memory status and retest all the DIMMs on  
the next boot. This parameter is automatically  
reset to "No" at the next boot.  
Specify whether to execute a memory test for  
extended memory or not. If the test is  
executed, specify the block size.  
Extended  
RAM Step  
1MB  
1KB  
Every location  
[Disabled]  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Sparing  
Specify whether to enable or disable online  
spare memory feature.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-15  
PCI Configuration  
The following screen appears if you select "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu. If you  
select a menu item preceded by symbol ³ and press Enter, the appropriate submenu appears.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
PCI Slot 1 - 5  
Option ROM  
Parameter  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Displays the submenu to specify whether to  
enable or disable the BIOS on the device  
(board) connected to PCI slot.  
Set this item to "Enabled" when:  
installing graphics accelerator board  
the disk array controller or SCSI controller  
is connected with the hard disk drive  
which contains an OS  
Set this item to "Disabled" when:  
the LAN controller which contains ROM  
BIOS is used but the board does not  
provide network booting.  
Disabling Option ROM Scan saves memory  
consumption and time for startup.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16 Configuring Your Server  
– Onboard Video Controller  
Option  
VGA Controller  
Parameter  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Auto]  
Description  
Specify whether the onboard video  
controller is enabled or disabled.  
Your Setting  
Onboard VGA  
Option ROM Scan  
Specify whether to execute option ROM  
scan of onboard video controller  
automatically or forcibly.  
Force  
[
]: Factory-set  
– Onboard LAN  
Option  
LAN Controller  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Description  
Specify whether the onboard LAN controller  
is enabled or disabled.  
Your Setting  
LAN1 Option ROM Disabled  
Scan [Enabled]  
LAN2 Option ROM Disabled  
Scan [Enabled]  
Specify whether the BIOS scan of onboard  
LAN controller 1 is enabled or disabled.  
Specify whether the BIOS scan of onboard  
LAN controller 2 is enabled or disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-17  
Peripheral Configuration  
The screen shown below appears if you select "Peripheral Configuration" on the Advanced menu. If  
you select a menu item preceded by symbol ³ and press Enter, the appropriate submenu appears.  
See the table below for the items.  
IMPORTANT: Note that the interrupt and/or base I/O address does  
not conflict with others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/O  
address is used in another resource, the yellow asterisk (*) appears.  
Reassign any item with the yellow asterisk properly.  
Option  
Serial Port A  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
[3F8]  
Description  
Selects whether serial port A is  
enabled or disabled.  
Your Setting  
Base I/O address  
Selects the base I/O address for serial  
port A.  
2F8  
3E8  
2E8  
Interrupt  
IRQ 3  
Selects the interrupt for a serial port A.  
[IRQ 4]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
3F8  
Serial Port B  
Base I/O address  
Selects whether serial port B is  
enabled or disabled (display only).  
Selects the base I/O address for serial  
port B.  
[2F8]  
3E8  
2E8  
Interrupt  
[IRQ 3]  
IRQ 4  
Selects the interrupt for a serial port B.  
USB 2.0 Controller  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Selects whether the USB 2.0 device is  
enabled or disabled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Parallel ATA  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
[Compatible]  
Enhanced  
Description  
Selects whether the parallel ATA is  
enabled or disabled.  
Your Setting  
Serial ATA  
Selects whether the serial ATA is  
enabled or disabled.  
SATA Controller  
Mode Option  
This menu is available only when  
"Serial ATA" is enabled.  
Selects the SATA Controller Mode  
Option on mother board.  
"Compatible": Automatically detects  
SATA hard disk drive and controls it as  
the normal hard disk drive.  
"Enhanced": Automatically detects  
SATA hard disk drive and controls it in  
native IDE mode.  
SATA AHCI  
SATA RAID  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
This option is available only when  
"Enhanced" is set for "SATA Controller  
Mode Option".  
Selects whether the SATA AHCI is  
enabled or disabled.  
This option is available only when  
"Enhanced" is set for "SATA Controller  
Mode Option".  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Selects whether the RAID disk drives  
that uses the onboard SATA is  
enabled or disabled.  
Note: If you attempt to start the system  
from SATA hard disk drive with  
different setting, the data may be  
destroyed.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-19  
Advanced Chipset Control  
The following screen appears if you select "Advanced Chipset Control" on the Advanced menu.  
Selecting an item on the screen allows the proper submenu to appear.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Multimedia Timer  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Specify whether the timer  
corresponding to multimedia is  
enabled or disabled.  
Intel(R) I/O AT  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the Intel(R) I/O  
Acceleration Technology feature is  
enabled or disabled.  
Wake On  
LAN/PME  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Specify whether the remote power-on  
function through a network is enabled  
or disabled.  
Wake On Ring  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the remote power-on  
function through a serial port is  
enabled or disabled.  
Wake On RTC  
Alarm  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the scheduling  
power-on function by using RTC alarm  
feature is enabled or disabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT: If supplying AC power to the server is stopped, the  
remote power-on function (Wake On LAN/PME and Wake On Ring) is  
disabled at the next boot. Press the POWER switch to restart the system.  
The Wake On LAN/PME and Wake On Ring functions are enabled  
when the DC power is supplied to the server at the next time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20 Configuring Your Server  
Security  
The Security menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of "Security."  
Press Enter on "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password" to display the dialog to  
set/change password.  
IMPORTANT:  
User password can be set only when Supervisor password is already  
set.  
Set the passwords only after OS is installed.  
If you forget the passwords, contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-21  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Supervisor  
Password Is  
Parameter  
Clear  
Set  
Description  
Indicates the password setting status.  
Your Setting  
User Password Is  
Clear  
Set  
Indicates the password setting status.  
Set Supervisor  
Password  
Up to eight  
alphanumerics  
Press Enter to display the supervisor  
password entry screen. This password  
enables all the SETUP menus to be  
accessed. This setting can be done  
only on login with the password input  
of "Supervisor" at start of SETUP.  
Set User  
Password  
Up to eight  
alphanumerics  
Press Enter to display the user  
password input screen. For this  
password, accessing to the SETUP  
menu is restricted.  
Password on boot* [Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether the passwords are  
entered or not on booting. At first the  
supervisor password must be set. If  
the supervisor password is set and  
this option is disabled, BIOS  
determines that a user is booting.  
Fixed disk boot  
sector  
[Normal]  
Write Protect  
Specify whether to permit writing into  
boot sector of the hard disk drive or  
not.  
Power Switch  
Inhibit  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Specify whether to enable or disable  
the power switch feature.  
[
]: Factory-set  
* You can set this item on [Set Supervisor Password] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22 Configuring Your Server  
Server  
The Server menu appears if you move the cursor to "Server."  
If you select a menu item preceded by symbol ³ and press Enter, the appropriate submenu appears.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
System  
Displays submenu.  
Management  
Console  
Displays submenu.  
Displays submenu.  
Redirection  
Event Log  
Configuration  
Assert NMI on  
SERR  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Indicates whether PCI SERR is  
supported or not.  
Assert NMI on  
PERR  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Indicates whether PCI PERR is  
supported or not.  
FRB-2 Policy  
Disable FRB2 Timer  
Disable BSP  
Do Not Disable BSP  
[Retry 3 Times]  
Set the FRB level 2 timer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-23  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Boot Monitoring  
[Disabled]  
Specify whether to enable or  
disable the boot monitoring  
function on booting, or select the  
time limit for timeout.  
Every 5 minutes  
between 5 minutes  
and 60 minutes  
To use this function, install NEC  
ESMPRO Agent. Set this item to  
"Disabled" if the system is booted  
from OS without installation of  
NEC ESMPRO Agent.  
Boot Monitoring  
Policy  
[Retry 3 Times]  
Retry Service Boot  
Always Reset  
Specify the processing at the  
occurrence of timeout during boot  
monitoring.  
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the  
system is reset after the  
occurrence of timeout and OS boot  
is retried up to three times.  
If [Retry Service Boot] is selected,  
the system is reset after the  
occurrence of timeout and OS boot  
is retried up to three times. Then  
the boot is tried from the service  
partition for three times. The failure  
in the third boot causes the system  
to stop booting.  
If [Always Reset] is selected, the  
system is reset after the  
occurrence of timeout and OS boot  
is retried repeatedly.  
* If no service partition exists in  
the system, OS boot is retried  
repeatedly from the system  
partition.  
Thermal Sensor  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Specify whether to enable or  
disable the thermal sensor  
monitoring function. If a thermal  
error is detected with this item  
being set to "Enabled", the system  
stops at the end of POST.  
BMC IRQ  
Disabled  
[IRQ 11]  
Set the IRQ for BMC.  
Post Error Pause  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Indicates whether POST is aborted  
once at the end of POST if an error  
occurs during the execution of  
POST.  
AC-LINK  
Stay Off  
[Last State]  
Power On  
Specify the state of power when  
the AC power to the server is  
turned off once and then on. (See  
the table below.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24 Configuring Your Server  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Power on Delay  
Time  
[0] - 255  
Specify the DC power on delay  
time within the range between 0  
and 255 seconds. The time  
specified is valid when "Power On"  
or "Last State" is specified for AC  
LINK.  
Platform Event  
Filtering  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
This item becomes meaningless  
when the notification feature of  
EXPRESSSCOPE Engine is  
enabled.  
[
]: Factory-set  
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on  
again, depending on the setting of "AC LINK."  
Setting of AC LINK  
System status before AC power off  
Stay Off  
Off  
Last State  
Power On  
Operating  
Aborting (DC power being off also)  
Forced shutdown  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
* Press the power switch continuously for four seconds or longer. This forcibly turns off the power.  
IMPORTANT:  
To power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible Power  
Supply), select [Server] - [AC Link] - [Power On].  
If the server is connected to the UPS, set at least 10 seconds delay in  
the power-on schedule.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-25  
System Management  
The following screen appears if you select "System Management" on the Server menu and press  
Enter.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
BIOS Version  
Board Part  
Number  
Displays the current BIOS version. (View only)  
Displays the mother board part number. (View  
only)  
Board Serial  
Number  
System Part  
Number  
System Serial  
Number  
Chassis Part  
Number  
-
Displays the mother board serial number.  
(View only)  
Displays the system code number. (View only)  
Displays the System serial number. (View only)  
Displays the chassis part number. (View only)  
Displays the chassis serial number. (View only)  
Chassis Serial  
Number  
Onboard LAN1  
MAC Address  
Onboard LAN2  
MAC Address  
Management LAN  
MAC Address  
BMC Device ID  
Displays the MAC address of onboard network  
controller 1. (View only)  
Displays the MAC address of onboard network  
controller 2. (View only)  
Displays the MAC address of management  
network controller 2. (View only)  
Displays the device ID of BMC (Baseboard  
Management Controller). (View only)  
Displays the revision of BMC (Baseboard  
Management Controller) device. (View only)  
Displays the revision of BMC (Baseboard  
Management Controller) firmware. (View only)  
Displays the revision of SDR (Sensor Data  
Record). (View only)  
BMC Device  
Revision  
BMC Firmware  
Revision  
SDR Revision  
PIA Revision  
Displays the revision of PIA (Platform  
Information Area). (View only)  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26 Configuring Your Server  
Console Redirection  
The following screen appears if you select "Console Redirection" on the Server menu and press  
Enter.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
BIOS Redirection  
Port  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Serial Port A  
Serial Port B  
[Disabled]  
Serial Port A  
Serial Port B  
9600  
Description  
Specify the serial port to which a  
remote console is connected.  
Your Setting  
ACPI Redirection  
Port  
Specify the serial port to which an  
ACPI console is connected.  
Baud Rate  
Specify the baud rate used for the  
interface with successive remote  
consoles.  
[19.2k]  
38.4k  
57.6k  
115.2k  
Flow Control  
None  
Specify the flow control method.  
XON/XOFF  
[CTS/RTS]  
CTS/RTS+CD  
PC ANSI  
[VT100+]  
VT-UTF8  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Terminal Type  
Specify the type of remote console.  
Remote Console  
Reset  
Specify whether to enable or disable  
the reset command issued from  
remote console.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-27  
Event Log Configuration  
The following screen appears if you select "Event Log Configuration" on the Server menu and press  
Enter.  
See the table below for the items.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Clear all Event  
Logs  
Enter  
Press Enter and select "Yes" on the  
confirmation screen to clear the  
system event log.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28 Configuring Your Server  
Boot  
If you move the cursor to the position of "Boot," the Boot menu appears, which is used to set the  
boot priority.  
The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting. Finding the boot software,  
the server starts the software.  
The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the , , +, and - keys. Move the cursor to  
the desired device with the or key and change the priority with the + or - key.  
IMPORTANT: To boot NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, set the priority of  
the devices as shown in the figure above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-29  
Exit  
The Exit menu appears if you move the cursor to "Exit."  
The options on the menu are described below.  
Exit Saving Changes  
Select this item to terminate SETUP after saving the newly selected information in CMOS  
(nonvolatile memory). Selecting "Exit Saving Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear. If  
you select "Yes," SETUP is terminated with the newly selected information saved in CMOS  
(nonvolatile memory). Then the server automatically reboots the system.  
Exit Discarding Changes  
Select this item to terminate SETUP without saving the newly selected information in CMOS  
(nonvolatile memory). When the confirmation message "Save before exiting?" appears, select "No"  
to terminate SETUP without storage of the modified information. Then the server proceeds to Boot  
menu. Selecting "Yes" allows SETUP to be terminated with storage of the modified information.  
Then the server automatically reboots the system.  
Load Setup Defaults  
Select this item to return all the values of SETUP to the default values. Selecting "Load Setup  
Defaults" causes the confirmation screen to appear. Select "Yes" to return the values to the default  
values. Select "No" to return to the Exit menu screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30 Configuring Your Server  
IMPORTANT: This option sets [SATA RAID Enabled] in the  
[Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] menu to [Disabled]. If the  
SATA hard disk drives are installed in your server and the onboard  
SATA RAID feature is used, change the parameter of the [SATA RAID  
Enabled] from [Disabled] to [Enabled] before exiting BIOS Setup.  
Leaving this parameter as the factory-set value (Disabled) may destroy  
the data in hard disk drive.  
NOTE: To display the [SATA RAID Enabled] menu, select  
[Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA Controller Mode  
Option] - [Enhanced].  
Load Custom Defaults  
Select this item and press Enter to load the custom defaults stored. This menu does not appear if  
the Custom Defaults are not saved.  
Save Custom Defaults  
Select this item and press Enter to save the parameters currently being edited as custom defaults.  
When the parameters are saved, the Load Custom Defaults menu appears.  
Discard Changes  
Select this item to return the values modified currently to the previous values before saving the  
values to CMOS.  
Save Changes  
Select this item to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory) without the  
termination of SETUP.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-31  
SETUP UTILITY  
This section describes the RAID configuration tool, LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility. This  
utility resides on the LSI Logic Software RAID, therefore, its operation is independent from the  
operating system.  
NOTE: The LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility cannot be  
operated through the remote console feature of NEC DianaScope.  
Running Setup Utility  
Running LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
1. When the following screen appears after you have powered on the server, press Esc.  
The POST screen appears.  
2. Check the description as shown below on the POST screen, then press Ctrl + M or Enter.  
LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility starts.  
LSI Logic SoftwareRAID BIOS Version xxxxxx  
LSI Logic MPT RAID Found at PCI Bus No:xx Dev No:xx  
Scanning for port 00 Responding xxxxxxxx xxxxMB  
Standard FW xxx DRAM=128MB(SDRAM)  
xx Logical drive(s) Configured  
Press <Ctrl><M> to Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
NOTE: Press Ctrl + M to start the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup  
Utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-32 Configuring Your Server  
LSI Logic Software RAID Configuration Utility TOP Menu (Management Menu)  
Exiting from LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
Press Esc in the TOP menu of LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
When a confirmation message appears, select [Yes].  
When the above message appears, press Ctrl + Alt + Delete.  
The server is rebooted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-33  
Menu Tree  
Setting list  
+: Selection/execution parameter : Setting parameter. : Information display  
>: Can be set (modified) after creation of logical drive  
Menu  
+Configure  
Description  
Performs Configuration settings  
+Easy Configuration  
Set configuration (Using fixed value)  
Set new configuration  
Additional setting / viewing configuration  
Clear configuration  
Chose Bootable Logical Drive  
Initialize logical drive  
Various settings  
+New Configuration  
+View/Add Configuration  
+Clear Configuration  
+Select Boot Drive  
+Initialize  
+Objects  
+Adapter  
+Sel. Adapter  
Set disk array controller  
Clear configuration  
Rebuild Rate  
Chk Const Rate  
FGI Rate  
30  
30  
30  
30  
BGI Rate  
Disk WC  
Read Ahead  
Display default value (setting not required)  
On  
Bios State  
Stop on Error  
Fast Init  
Enable  
No  
Enable  
Auto Rebuild  
Auto Resume  
Disk Coercion  
Factory Default  
On  
Enable  
1GB  
Default setting  
Logical drive operation  
Select logical drive (when multiple logical drives exist)  
Initialize logical drive  
Check logical drive redundancy  
Display logical drive information  
Display RAID level  
+Logical Drive  
+Logical Drives  
+Initialize  
+Check Consistency  
+View/Update Parameters  
RAID  
SIZE  
Stripe SIZE  
#Stripes  
State  
Spans  
Display logical drive capacity  
Display stripe size  
Display the number of hard disk drives in logical drive  
Display logical drive status  
Display setting of span  
Display setting of write cache  
Display setting of read ahead  
Physical drive operation  
Select physical drive  
Set as hot-spare disk for auto rebuilding  
Make a disk online  
Disk WC  
Read Ahead  
+Physical Drive  
+Physical Drive Selection Menu  
+Make HotSpare  
+Force Online  
+Force Offline  
+Drive Properties  
Device Type  
Capacity  
Make a disk offline  
Display hard disk drive information  
Hard disk drive type  
Hard disk drive capacity  
Hard disk drive model  
Hard disk drive revision  
Perform rebuilding  
Product ID  
Revision No.  
+Rebuild  
+Check Consistency  
Perform logical drive redundancy check  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34 Configuring Your Server  
Operating Procedures for Setup Utility  
Creating/Adding Configuration  
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
Set new configuration information (pack/logical drive settings)  
Check the logical drive settings  
Initialize logical drive  
Perform Consistency Check  
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
1. Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
2. Select "Configure" "New Configuration" from the TOP menu (Management Menu).  
Select "View/add Configuration" to add configuration.  
IMPORTANT:  
Creating a configuration using "New Configuration" menu clears  
the existing configuration information. To add configuration  
information to the existing configuration, select "View/add  
Configuration."  
You cannot create Spanning of RAID1 or set the logical drive  
capacity on "Easy Configuration" menu.  
Use "New Configuration" or "View/Add Configuration" instead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-35  
3. When a confirmation message (Proceed?) is displayed, select "Yes."  
The SCAN DEVICE starts (scanning information is displayed at the bottom of the screen).  
Upon completion of SCAN DEVICE, the "New Configuration - ARRAY SELECTION  
MENU" screen appears.  
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be packed by using cursor key and then press  
Space to select the hard disk drive.  
The display for the selected hard disk drive changes from READY to ONLINE.  
5. Press F10 to set "Select Configurable Array(s)".  
6. Press Space.  
SPAN-1 is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36 Configuring Your Server  
7. Press F10 to create logical drive.  
The "Logical Drives Configure" screen appears. (The figure below shows an example of  
RAID1 configured with two hard disk drives.)  
Logical Drives Configured  
LD  
0
RAID  
1
Size  
xxxMB  
#Stripes  
2
Stripe Sz  
64KB  
Status  
ONLINE  
Logical Drive0  
RAID = 1  
Size = xxxxMB  
DWC = On  
RA = On  
Accept  
Span = NO  
8. Select "RAID," "Size", "DWC", "RA", or "Span" by using cursor keys. Then press Enter  
to fix the selection and set each value.  
(1) "RAID": Sets RAID level.  
Parameter  
Remarks  
0
RAID0  
1
RAID1  
10  
Spanning of RAID1  
The selectable RAID level varies depending on the number of hard disk drives  
that configure a pack.  
(2) "Size": Sets logical drive size.  
Up to 40 logical drives can be created per disk array controller.  
(3) "DWC": Sets parameter for Disk Write Cache.  
Parameter  
Off  
On  
Remarks  
Write through  
Write back  
(4) "RA": Sets parameter for Read Ahead.  
Parameter  
Off  
On  
Remarks  
Does not perform read ahead.  
Performs read ahead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-37  
(5) "Span: Sets Span.  
Parameter  
SPAN=NO  
SPAN=YES  
Remarks  
Does not set span.  
Sets span.  
When performing SPAN, create two or more sets of the same pack at pack creation, as  
shown in the figure below.  
Spanning of RAID1  
ID  
ONLIN A00-01  
ONLIN A00-02  
ONLIN A01-01  
ONLIN A01-02  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
RAID1  
RAID1  
SPAN  
9. When all settings are completed, select "Accept" and then press Enter to create logical  
drive.  
The created logical drive is displayed in the "Logical Drive Configured" screen.  
10. After creating logical drive, press Esc to close the screen.  
Go back to the "Save Configuration?" screen and then select "Yes" to save the  
configuration.  
11. When the confirmation message shows that the configuration has been saved, press Esc  
to return to the TOP menu screen.  
12. On the TOP menu screen, select "Objects" "Logical Drive" "View/Update  
Parameters" to check logical drive information.  
13. Select "Initialize" in the TOP menu screen.  
14. When the "Logical Drives" screen appears, move the cursor to the logical drive to be  
initialized, and press Space.  
The logical drive is selected.  
15. After selecting logical drive, press F10 to start initialization.  
A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes" to start initialization.  
When the progress bar in the "Initialize Logical Drive Progress" screen indicates 100%,  
initialization is completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38 Configuring Your Server  
16. Execute Check Consistency on the logical drive that has been initialized.  
See "Check Consistency" for details.  
17. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit from LSI Logic Software RAID Setup  
Utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating configuration.  
Check Consistency has two modes: "check and recover" and "check  
only".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-39  
Manual Rebuild  
Replace hard disk drive  
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
Execute rebuilding  
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
1. Replace a hard disk drive and turn on the server.  
2. Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
3. Select "Rebuild" from the TOP menu.  
The "Rebuild – PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU" screen appears.  
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive displaying "FAIL," and then press Space to  
select it.  
Multiple hard disk drives can be selected (simultaneous rebuilding.)  
5. The "FAIL" indication for the hard disk drive selected starts blinking.  
6. When hard disk drive has been selected, press F10 to start rebuilding.  
7. When confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes".  
The rebuild process starts.  
When the progress bar in the "Rebuild Physical Drives in Progress" screen indicates 100%,  
rebuilding is completed.  
8. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-40 Configuring Your Server  
Setting Hot Spare  
Install a hard disk drive  
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
Set for hot spare.  
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
1. Install a hard disk drive to be used as hot spare, and then turn on the server.  
2. Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
3. Select "Objects" "Physical Drive" from the TOP menu.  
The "Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVE SELECTION MENU" screen appears.  
4. Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be used as hot spare and press Enter.  
5. The "Port #X" screen appears. Select "Make HotSpare."  
6. A confirmation screen appears. Select "Yes."  
The hard disk drive indication is changed to "HOTSP."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-41  
7. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
Select "Objects" "Physical Drive" "Port #X" "Force  
Offline" to cancel the hot spare setting.  
When two or more hard disk drives (of the same capacity) are  
assigned as hot spare, rebuilding is performed in order starting from  
the one with the smaller CH number/ID number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-42 Configuring Your Server  
Check Consistency  
Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
Perform Check Consistency  
Exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility  
1. Run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
2. Select "Check Consistency" from the TOP menu.  
The "Logical Drives" screen appears.  
3. Move the cursor onto the logical drive to be checked, and press Space to select it.  
4. When logical drive has been selected, press F10 to start consistency check.  
5. A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes".  
The consistency check starts.  
When the progress bar in the "Check Consistency Progress" screen indicates 100%, the  
consistency check is completed.  
6. Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating configuration.  
Check Consistency has two modes: "check and recover" and "check  
only".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-43  
Others  
1. Clear Configuration  
Clears configuration information. Select "Configure" "Clear Configuration" from the  
TOP menu. Executing "Clear Configuration" clears all configuration information on the  
disk array controller and hard disk drives. The configuration information on all channels  
of the disk array controller is also cleared.  
NOTES:  
When configuration information on the disk array controller and  
that on the hard disk drive do not match (excluding at replacement  
of faulty disk array controller), configuration mail fail if you select  
the configuration information on the disk array controller. In this  
case, execute "Clear Configuration" to create configuration again.  
LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility cannot delete each logical  
drive. Use MegaRAID Storage Manager instead.  
2. Force Online  
Puts a hard disk drive being in the FAIL status online.  
Select "Objects" "Physical Drive" (select hard disk drive) "Force Online" from  
the TOP menu.  
3. Rebuild Rate  
Sets the Rebuild Rate.  
Select "Objects" "Adapter" "Sel. Adapter" "Rebuild Rate" from the TOP menu.  
Available value is between 0% and 100%. Default value (recommended) is 30%.  
4. Hard disk drive information  
Checks hard disk drive information.  
Select "Objects" "Physical Drive" (select hard disk drive) "Drive Properties"  
from the TOP menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-44 Configuring Your Server  
ADD-IN CARD'S BIOS  
Refer to the documentation coming with the optional add-in card for details.  
When the server has multiple optional PCI boards installed, the server first displays the start-up  
message of the BIOS SETUP Utility of the mother board. It then displays the utility start-up  
message for optional PCI boards one by one. The start-up message appears for the optional PCI  
board in the PCI #1 slot first, then PCI #2, PCI #3, PCI #4, and finally PCI #5. The message  
displayed may vary depending on the optional PCI board. Refer to the manual that comes with the  
optional PCI board for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-45  
CONFIGURING MOTHER BOARD JUMPERS  
You can use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.  
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may cause the  
server to fail or malfunction.  
Clearing CMOS sets [SATA RAID Enabled] in the [Advanced] -  
[Peripheral Configuration] menu to [Disabled]. If the SATA hard  
disk drives are installed in your server and the onboard SATA  
RAID feature is used, change the parameter of the [SATA RAID  
Enabled] from [Disabled] to [Enabled] before exiting BIOS Setup.  
Leaving this parameter as the factory-set value (Disabled) may  
destroy the data in hard disk drive.  
NOTE: To display the [SATA RAID Enabled] menu, select  
[Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA Controller Mode  
Option] - [Enhanced].  
Clear  
Protect  
Mother board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-46 Configuring Your Server  
The following describe the clearing procedure.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages  
1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.  
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.  
IMPORTANT: Components inside the server are easily affected by  
static electricity. Handle a component after making your body contact  
with a metallic frame section of the server to discharge the static  
electricity on your body. Do not make bare hands contact with  
terminals and components. See "Static Precautions" in this chapter for  
details of the static electricity.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" in Chapter 9 to prepare  
2. Remove the left side cover (see Chapter 9).  
3. Change jumper switching setting from "Protect" to "Clear".  
IMPORTANT:  
Use the clip over jumper pins 1 and 2 on the mother board.  
Do not lose the clip.  
4. After three seconds later, reinstall the jumper.  
5. Reinstall the server and then turn on the power.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Your Server 4-47  
6. Press F2 during POST to run the BIOS Setup utility, and configure the mother board  
again.  
IMPORTANT: If the SATA hard disk drives are installed in your  
server and the onboard SATA RAID feature is used, change the  
parameter of the [SATA RAID Enabled] in the [Advanced] -  
[Peripheral Configuration] menu from [Disabled] to [Enabled] before  
exiting BIOS Setup. Leaving this parameter as the factory-set value  
(Disabled) may destroy the data in hard disk drive.  
NOTE: To display the [SATA RAID Enabled] menu, select  
[Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA Controller Mode  
Option] - [Enhanced].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-48 Configuring Your Server  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Installing the Operating System with Express  
Setup  
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following  
operating systems to the server.  
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows® Server  
2003 Enterprise Edition  
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows® Server  
2003 R2 Enterprise Edition  
To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section, contact your service  
representative.  
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the  
system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP." See  
Chapter 4 for detail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5-2 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
About Express Setup  
"Express Setup" helps you to install the Windows Operating System.  
The setup automatically configures the RAID system and installs the Operating System and some  
management software.  
IMPORTANT: Executing the Express Setup erases all data on the  
hard disk drive.  
You can also use "Configuration disk" at "Express Setup" in order to save or backup parameters for  
installation.  
The Configuration disk is able to have some parameters files that include the configuration  
information for the server setup.  
If you want to set up the server as before, execute the Express Setup with the parameters file you  
have saved that time.  
NOTES:  
The parameters file is not mandatory to set up the system.  
If you want to create a parameters file, have a blank floppy disk  
(MS-DOS 1.44MB format) ready.  
If you want to use the drivers located on the "OEM-Disk for Mass  
Storage Device" that ships with optional boards, a parameters file  
is mandatory.  
You can create a parameters file in advance using "Configuration  
Diskette Creator" included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-3  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 in the server.  
Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation.  
NOTES:  
Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server  
x64 Editions. If you want to install it, see Appendix D.  
If you want to install the Windows Server 2003 without using  
Express Setup, see Appendix E.  
Installation Notice  
This section explains what you should know before the installation of Windows.  
About Windows family  
Express Setup supports the installation of the following Windows 2003 editions:  
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows® Server  
2003 Enterprise Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows Server 2003")  
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows® Server  
2003 R2 Enterprise Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows Server 2003")  
If you want to install the other OS, contact your sales representative.  
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver  
To install optional mass storage driver, see "Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file.  
BIOS Settings  
Before installing Windows Server 2003, confirm if the BIOS settings are correct.  
See Chapter 4 to confirm the settings.  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
NEC ESMPRO Agent requires to install the necras.sys driver on your Windows system. If you  
install the Windows without using the Express Setup, run the "Update Express5800 system" in  
Master Control Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional  
Raid Controller and SCSI Controller:  
NOTE: If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy  
disk ("OEM-FD for Mass storage device"), except ones listed below,  
see "Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass storage device" and  
"Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette  
Creator" in Chapter 6.  
<SAS Hard Disk Model>  
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup  
– N8103-91 Disk Array Controller (Internal SAS HDD)*  
– N8103-99 Disk Array Controller (0ch)*  
– LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID(embedded on the mother board)  
Other controllers  
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)*  
– N8103-75 SCSI Controller*  
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller*  
<SATA Hard Disk Model>  
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup  
– N8103-101 Disk Array Controller (SATA2)*  
– LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID(embedded on the mother board)  
Other controllers  
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)*  
– N8103-75 SCSI Controller*  
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller*  
* Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-5  
Windows Server 2003  
Express Setup can install the Windows Server 2003.  
Confirm below notes before installing the Windows.  
IMPORTANT:  
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of  
hardware settings (BIOS and optional board settings).  
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving  
Problems".  
Installing on the Mirrored Volume  
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk  
Management", invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk,  
and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed.  
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer  
Management".  
Mounting MO Device  
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation.  
About removable media  
Do not set removable media, such as DAT, into the device mounted on your server during the OS  
installation.  
Connecting Hard Disk Drive  
Do not connect the other hard disk drives except the drive that you want to create as the Windows  
system drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Creating Partition Size  
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following  
formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size  
+ Application Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 3500MB (Windows Server 2003R2)  
3500MB (Windows Server 2003 with Service  
Pack1)  
4400MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack1  
CD-ROM)  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5  
Dump file Size  
Application Size  
= Mounted Memory Size + 12MB  
= Required Size  
IMPORTANT:  
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for  
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file  
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot  
drive is required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to  
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set  
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.  
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is  
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify  
4095MB for the paging file size.  
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB  
memory mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the  
above formula as follows:  
3500MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) + Application Size  
= 4792MB + Application Size  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve  
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to  
be written to a separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written,  
then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size",  
install an additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-7  
Re-installing to the hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk  
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk drive  
upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained.  
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix E to re-install the system.  
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "EISA")  
In disk area, an area displayed as "EISA" may exist. This area is maintenance partition for saving  
configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.  
Application of Service Pack  
When using Windows Server 2003 with this equipment, surely apply Service Pack 1. When  
installing Windows Server 2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-8 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
The Flow of Setup  
This section shows the flow of the Express setup.  
: Process that proceeds automatically  
: Process that needs to input or select  
Do you want to proceed the setup using the setup parameter file?  
Yes  
Read notes and restrictions  
No  
Confirmed  
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive  
Confirmed  
Confirmed  
New File  
(Select Setup Parameter File)  
Existing File  
Check Setup Parameter File  
Correct  
Skipped  
Select whether or not to confirm/modify the setting  
Confirmed  
Disk Array Configuration Screen  
Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities  
Operating System Installation Menu  
Create the OS partition after the reboot  
Confirm Setup File Create New File  
No Floppy Disk  
Confirm the specification and input the value  
In case [Skip] is selected  
Remove the Floppy Disk and CD-ROM  
Copying NEC Modules  
from the Drive  
Copying Selected Application Modules  
Insert Windows CD-ROM  
Agree Software License Agreement  
Insert SP CD-ROM  
(If you selected [Yes] on  
[Apply Service Pack].)  
Install OS Automatically  
Log on Automatically  
After restarting the computer, the  
installation is completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-9  
Installing the Windows Server 2003  
Express Setup proceeds the setup by specifying the necessary information on the wizard. You can  
also save the setup information created on the wizard in a floppy disk as a setup file.  
NOTES:  
Prepare a floppy disk to use as Configuration Disk if you want to  
save the parameters or use the drivers located on the "OEM-Disk  
for Mass Storage Device" that ships with optional boards. When  
using the floppy disk, the Express setup can continue the setup  
without specifying the parameters.  
On remote KVM console, you cannot use the mouse in Procedures  
1 through 15. Use the keyboard.  
: Used to move to the next screen.  
: Used to return to the previous screen.  
↑ ↓: Used to select a menu.  
F1: Displays help.  
ENTER: Used to select [OK] or to decide each item.  
ESC: Used to select [Cancel].  
1. Turn the power of peripheral device on, and then turn on the server.  
NOTES:  
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows  
installation.  
Do not connect the other hard disk drives except the drive that you  
want to create as the Windows system drive.  
If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to  
"Reinstalling the operation system when multiple logical drives  
exist" (Appendix E).  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.  
3. Press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
The system boots from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
4. Click [Express Setup].  
5. The message, "Do you want to use the parameters file in order to set up the Express server  
or workstation?", appears.  
If you want to use the parameters file, click [Yes].  
If not, click [No].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
6. "NOTE" appears. Click [Confirm] after reading that.  
NOTE: If any operating systems have been installed on the hard disk  
drive already, the message that prompts you to select continuing or  
stopping appears.  
7. If you select "Yes" at step 5, place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the  
server.  
If not, go on the next step.  
NOTE: If you set the floppy disk at this step, do not remove the  
floppy disk from the server until the message as removing the floppy  
disk appears.  
[Using the existing Configuration Disk]  
The parameters files in the floppy disk is listed in dialogue-box.  
1) Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup.  
After the parameters file is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify  
the Setup File parameters?" appears.  
2) If you want to modify or confirm the parameters file, click [Review]. If not, click  
[Skip].  
Click [Review] Go on the next step.  
Click [Skip] Go on the step 9.  
[Using a blank disk]  
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.  
The dialog box appears.  
2) Input the file name and click [Use].  
8. Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration.  
NOTE: If you do not use disk array controller, go on the next step.  
If a Disk array controller is installed or the On-board RAID is enabled, the [Configure  
RAID] dialog-box appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary, and then click  
[OK].  
When the dialogue-box is closed, the Express setup automatically performs the RAID  
configuration, creating Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.  
9. Select the installing Operating system.  
Select "Windows" from the menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-11  
10. Next, [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary,  
and then click [Next].  
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen to continue. Modify the  
parameters each time if necessary.  
IMPORTANT:  
Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally  
required size.  
If you select "Use Existing Partition" at "System Partition", the  
information included in the first partition (excluding maintenance  
partition) will all be formatted and deleted. The information  
included in the other partition will be retained. In the figure below,  
describes the partition which information will be deleted when  
maintenance partition exists.  
First Partition  
<Maintenance Partition>  
Retained  
Second  
Partition  
Deleted  
Third  
Partition  
Retained Retained  
Fourth  
Partition  
You can not re-install the system with the existing partition that is  
upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use Existing  
Partition" at "System Partition".  
If you specify other than 4095MB for the "Installing Partition", it  
is necessary to convert to NTFS.  
If "Use Existing Partition" at "System Partition" is selected but the  
partition other than the one to install Windows Server 2003 does  
not exist (excluding maintenance partition), Express Setup will  
reserve the maximum area of the hard disk drive to install  
Windows Server 2003.  
You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.  
To specify the setup parameters, the number of characters must not  
exceed the limit as shown in the table below. (Double-byte  
character shall be counted as two characters.)  
Max. number  
of characters  
Item  
Value specified  
Create Users  
User Name  
Group Name  
Full Name  
Explanation  
Group Name  
19  
20  
63  
47  
20  
Create Groups  
Explanation (Group Name) 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
NOTE: If you press F9 in [Role of Computer], the installation will be  
done using the default values of Express Setup for the subsequent  
settings automatically. (Only when the [OK] is displayed in the lower  
right of the screen).  
11. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.  
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to  
mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the  
installation.  
NOTE: You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is  
attached to the system.  
12. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive according  
to the message.  
If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file, remove the floppy disk from the  
floppy disk drive.  
Insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
[Agree Software License Agreement] screen appears.  
13. Read the agreement carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do  
not agree, click [I disagree] or press F3.  
IMPORTANT:  
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and  
Windows Server 2003 will not be installed.  
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install,  
the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and  
Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specify the appropriate  
value.  
14. If you selected [Yes] on [Apply Service Pack] at Basic Information, follow the procedure  
below.  
1) Follow the message to take Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM out of the DVD-ROM  
drive.  
2) Follow the message to insert Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 or later into the  
DVD-ROM drive.  
Windows Server 2003 and the specified application will be installed automatically and  
logon to the system. Install and configure the device drivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-13  
15. If you install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
R2 Standard Edition DISC 2 or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition  
DISC 2 into the DVD-ROM drive after the OS installation.  
Hereinafter, proceed operations according to the message.  
When the installation has finished, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard  
Edition DISC 2 or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition DISC 2 from  
the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the system.  
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Installing and Setting Device Drivers  
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory.  
DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PROSET\2KXPWS03  
The [Intel® PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Complete" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-15  
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)  
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter  
and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group  
when any trouble occurred on that adapter.  
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter  
and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters.  
This feature includes AFT feature.  
IMPORTANT:  
AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and  
restarting the system.  
All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must  
exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to the separate  
switches, they will not work normally.  
If you want to utilize AFT/ALB feature, follow the procedure below to setup.  
1. The [Intel (R) PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and click  
[Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in the  
Network Adapter list.  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [administrative tools].  
3. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in  
the Network Adapter list.  
2. Select [Teaming] tab and then check on [Team with other adapters] and click [New  
Team...].  
The [New Team Wizard] dialog box appears. Click [Next].  
* Specify a name for the team if it necessary.  
3. Select the adapters to include in team.  
4. Select "Adapter Fault Tolerance" or "Adaptive Load Balancing" and click [Next].  
5. Click [Finish].  
6. The setup will go back to [Intel (R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box, so  
click[OK].  
7. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-16 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and  
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
IP addresses is not be able to set when the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box OFF.  
This phenomenon will occur with the certain condition.  
Check ON the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box and IP address will be able to set.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click  
[Local Area Connection].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-17  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel(R) PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and click  
[Computer Management] and then double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in the  
Network Adapter list.  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [administrative tools].  
3. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in  
the Network Adapter list.  
2. Click the [Link] and specify the [Speed and Duplex] value the same as the value specified  
for HUB.  
3. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be  
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at  
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the  
packet)that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or  
receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For  
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving  
Problems" described later in this chapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-18 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Optional Network Board Driver  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-112/119/111/86/120/121), the network driver  
will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be  
used.  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-86/111), install the driver stored in NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
In case of utilizing (N8104-86/111)  
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO100\WS03XP2K"  
In case of utilizing (N8104-112/119/120/121)  
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO1000\WS03XP2K"  
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the  
section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".  
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver  
1. Start Device Manager.  
2. Click [Network adapters] and Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].  
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.  
NOTE: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter. All  
other names show the Optional Network Board.  
3. Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard] appears.  
4. Select the [Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)] radio button and click  
[Next].  
5. Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the  
[Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.  
6. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [(N8104-  
86/111)], specify  
[DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO100\WS03XP2K].  
Then click [Next].  
When using [(N8104-112/119/120/121)], specify  
[DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO1000\WS03XP2K].  
Then click [Next].  
7. Click [Finish].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-19  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
The graphics accelerator driver will be automatically installed by Express Setup or system update.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75/95)  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-75/95), update your system with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (N8103-80F)  
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the  
controller and take the following steps to install the driver:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools]→  
[Computer Management].  
2. Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-1] which Device Manager lists.  
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search removable  
media [floppy, CD-ROM...]" check box.  
6. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy  
disk drive, and click [Next].  
7. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard]  
dialog box below appears. Click [Finish].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-20 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Notes of N8103-75  
After installing OS, the driver may not be installed depending on the method of installing OS  
occasionally.  
In that case, please install the driver by the following procedures.  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools]  
[Computer Management].  
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy  
disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI ]  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-21  
Available switch options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini file.  
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.  
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:  
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721  
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini  
files"  
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in  
Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.  
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.  
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.  
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 291988  
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension  
switch"  
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.  
1. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].  
2. In [Control Panel], double-click [System].  
3. Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].  
4. Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].  
5. Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.  
<Example of Boot.ini file>  
[boot loader]  
timeout=30  
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS  
[operating systems]  
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003" /fastdetect  
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, PAE" /fastdetect  
/PAE  
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons  
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.  
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating  
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you  
can make your system start automatically from the switch you  
specified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-22 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Setting for Solving Problems  
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely  
and as soon as possible when it should occur.  
Memory Dump (Debug Information)  
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the  
server.  
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump  
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of  
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the  
memory dump.  
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the  
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory  
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you restart the  
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to specify.  
1. Select [Control Panel] and click [System].  
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.  
2. Select [Advanced] tab.  
3. Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-23  
IMPORTANT:  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug  
information is recommended.  
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete  
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel  
Memory Dump" instead.  
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of  
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 1MB".  
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added  
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel  
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging  
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to  
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the  
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.  
Windows Server 2003  
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug  
information is recommended.  
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete  
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel  
Memory Dump" instead.  
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of  
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB" (In  
case the memory capacity is more than 2GB, a free area of  
"2048+12MB" or more).  
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added  
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel  
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging  
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to  
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the  
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-24 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
4. Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Write debugging  
information] group box.  
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".  
D:\MEMORY.DMP  
5. Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.  
The [Performance Options] window appears.  
6. Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.  
7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.  
8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value larger than  
[Recommended], and click [Set].  
IMPORTANT:  
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for  
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file  
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot  
drive is required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to  
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set  
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.  
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Creating  
Partition Size" described earlier.  
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit  
the new memory size.  
9. Click [OK].  
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification. In  
such case, follow the message to restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-25  
Windows Dr. Watson  
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr.  
Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below and  
specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.  
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.  
2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].  
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.  
3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.  
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".  
NOTE: You can not specify network path. Specify the path on local  
computer.  
4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.  
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with  
Windows Debugger.  
5. Check the following check box on the [Option] box.  
Dump Symbol Table  
Dump All Thread Contexts  
Add To Existing Log File  
Create Crash Dump File  
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.  
6. Click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-26 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Network Monitor  
Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. To utilize  
Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so we  
recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.  
1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].  
The [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].  
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.  
4. Click [Management and Monitoring Tools] and then click [Details].  
The [Management and Monitoring Tools] dialog appears.  
5. Click to select the [Network Monitor Tools] check box, and then click [OK].  
6. The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears again, so click [Next].  
7. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert the OS CD-ROM into DVD-ROM drive and  
click [OK].  
8. Click [Finish] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.  
9. Close the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box.  
10. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.  
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] [Administrative Tools] and click [Network  
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.  
Installing Maintenance Utilities  
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See  
Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5-27  
Updating the System – Installing Service Pack –  
Update the system in the situation below:  
Modified system configuration.  
Recovered the system using recovery process.  
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g. Supervisor) and insert  
the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Setup] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item.  
Click [Update Express5800 System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the  
message to continue the setup process.  
Making Backup Copies of System Information  
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the  
server.  
Save the information after completing the system setup.  
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.  
You can save the information by the following process.  
1. Insert the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive and reboot  
the system.  
2. Select [Tools].  
3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
4. Select [System Information Management].  
5. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.  
6. Select [Save].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-28 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup  
Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass Storage Device  
This section explains how to setup with the OEM-FD. You usually do not have to do as follows. If  
your system has any Mass storage devices, you have to set as follows depending on your system.  
The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass storage device.  
Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup  
If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to  
be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.  
1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.  
2. If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID system before  
running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
3. Boot the system from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
4. (a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check "Use Existing Array".  
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".  
5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.  
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.  
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to messages displayed on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Installing and Using Utilities  
This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your  
server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6-2 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of  
installing and configuring your server. Shipped with all NEC servers, the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM provides a flexible, guided installation process for system  
administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or other operating systems (contact your  
service representative for the server certified operating systems).  
NOTE: Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup,  
complete the hardware configuration.  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes two distinct programs. One can be booted under DOS for initial  
setup, and one is for use under Windows operating system.  
DOS-based with local console  
Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose the server  
and to install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the system  
drive.  
NOTE: A mouse can't be used when NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is  
operated with the remote KVM console. Use a keyboard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-3  
Windows-based  
This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the Microsoft  
Windows system (Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can install the  
several applications and read the documentation from the menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with  
local console.  
Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The following procedure instructs you to start NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-  
ROM while NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is running.  
1. Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into the DVD-  
ROM drive of your server.  
3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-5  
Express Setup  
"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the  
user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts  
for software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID  
settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operating system.  
If you install Windows Server 2003, after a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be done is to  
remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and install the Windows CD-ROM, input a  
product ID number, and acknowledge the license agreement.  
IMPORTANT:  
The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server  
system and, therefore, the Express Setup clears the contents of the  
hard disk drive.  
Once Express setup is started, do not remove "Configuration  
Diskette" from the floppy disk drive without any directions.  
Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server  
2003 x64 Editions.  
Tools  
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It provides more installation options than  
Express Setup and permits the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility, set up a maintenance partition, and update the  
various BIOS programs.  
Tools Menu  
RAID Board: None  
Server Management Board:  
None  
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
System Diagnostics  
System Configuration: None  
Create Support Disk  
Setup Maintenance Partition  
BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
System Management  
Help  
Return to the Top Menu  
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data  
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or  
restored from the floppy disk.  
– Save Disk Array Configuration Data  
The configuration information on the disk mirroring controller is saved into the floppy  
disk. If you set or change RAID, always use this function to save the configuration  
information into the floppy disk.  
IMPORTANT: Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this  
function. In that case, this menu will not be shown.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6 Installing and Using Utilities  
– Restore Disk Array Configuration Data  
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard  
disk drive on the disk mirroring controller.  
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the  
configuration information.  
When the defected disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information on  
the hard disk drive must be saved into the disk array controller.  
However, if the configuration information on the new disk mirroring controller is saved  
into a hard disk drive, use this function to restore the configuration information.  
IMPORTANT:  
Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In that  
case, this menu will not be shown.  
This is a function for maintenance. Please do not use it except  
maintenance.  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program that performs  
preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 8 or online help  
for details.  
System Diagnostics  
Executes various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and  
if the connection between the server and additional board is normal.  
After the System Diagnostics is executed, a system check program assigned to each model  
starts. See Chapter 7 for details.  
Create Support Disk  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities  
that you can put on floppy disks and load onto your system.  
Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM. If your system has the Windows operating system, you may find it more  
convenient to use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-based to make support disks.  
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management in the  
future. Customers are to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.  
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
– Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003. (No need to create this disk  
when installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)  
– ROM-DOS Startup FD  
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-7  
– Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD  
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
Setup Maintenance Partition  
Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk.  
About 55MB of the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and  
executable commands.  
In this menu, you can create the maintenance partition, install the various utilities, and  
update the utilities. The maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are  
system diagnostics and Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu. If  
the processing is discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.  
The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from  
the operating system. In order to retain the Configuration Data, do  
not delete the partition.  
NOTES:  
The maintenance partition, once created, will not be recreated  
again.  
When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu items  
do not appear.  
– Create Maintenance Partition  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55MB of the maintenance partition on the  
system disk (or disk array system) as work area. The various utilities are installed when  
the maintenance partition is created successfully or when the maintenance partition is  
already created.  
– Install Maintenance Partition Utilities  
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.  
– Update Maintenance Partition Utilities  
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk. This  
menu is only used when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or  
attached with your system.  
– FDISK  
Execute FDISK command of ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete partitions, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8 Installing and Using Utilities  
System Management  
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote control  
and alert.  
BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the  
server by using the update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from NEC  
customer service representative.  
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from the floppy  
disk, and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated.  
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program is  
running. If the update processing is discontinued, the system becomes  
unable to start.  
Help  
Displays explanations about various functions of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Return to the Top Menu  
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-9  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console  
This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with  
remote console.  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator  
to set up the server from the management workstation (management PC) via the network or the  
server's COM B (serial) port.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server, or  
on any other server obtained without the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER. Doing so may cause a failure of the  
server.  
To use the remote console feature, a floppy disk containing a  
configuration information file named "CSL_LESS.CFG" must be  
inserted in the floppy disk drive. If "CSL_LESS.CFG" is not found  
in floppy disk, no menu is displayed on the management PC.  
If you fail to configure the disk array controller N8103-80F or 81F  
from the remote console, try again using the server console.  
The system may fail to operate with the transfer rate of 115.2 Kbps  
for serial console redirection. Specify any other transfer rate than  
115.2 Kbps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10 Installing and Using Utilities  
Starting  
The following two methods are available to start the server.  
Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN  
Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection  
(COM B)  
For the procedure for starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console, see  
"NEC DianaScope".  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS  
SETUP. NEC EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the DVD-  
ROM drive is not the first device to launch the system.  
To use the remote console feature, a floppy disk containing a  
configuration information file must be inserted in the floppy disk  
drive. You can create a configuration information file by using  
System Management feature in the Tools menu or by NEC  
DianaScope Configuration menu. The configuration information  
file must be named as "CSL_LESS.CFG" and stored in the root  
directory of the floppy disk.  
NOTE: The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as  
shown below.  
LAN Controller:  
[Enabled]  
Serial Port A:  
Base I/O Address:  
Interrupt:  
[Enabled]  
[3F8]  
[IRQ 4]  
Serial Port B:  
Base I/O Address:  
Interrupt:  
[Enabled]  
[2F8]  
[IRQ 3]  
BIOS Redirection Port: [Serial B]  
Baud Rate:  
[19.2K]  
Flow Control:  
Console Type:  
[CTS/RTS]  
[PC ANSI]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-11  
Top Menu  
Shown below are the top menu items.  
Setup  
Automatically sets up the server.  
Tools  
Launch the features of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually.  
Help  
Help message on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Quit  
Quit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Setup  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server. The disk array  
and maintenance partition are automatically configured.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12 Installing and Using Utilities  
Tools  
When you select the [Tools] on the Top Menu, the following screen appears.  
The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section "NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Local Console" are displayed. See the previous  
subsection for detailed explanation of menu items.  
IMPORTANT: The following is varied from the [Tools] menu in the  
local console mode.  
Test items and operation method of System Diagnostics. See  
Chapter 7 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-13  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)  
The Master Control Menu is used to,  
Read the User's Guide or the other documents,  
Update the NEC Express5800 system, and  
Install the management software.  
NOTES:  
Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or later) or  
Windows NT 4.0 (or later).  
Some documents are provided in the PDF format. Use the Adobe  
Acrobat Reader to read these documents.  
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive. Master Control Menu  
appears on the screen automatically. If the Autorun function is invalid in your system, run the  
\MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly. Some items are grayed-out when the logon user does  
not have the authority of the administrator or the item is not proper for the system.  
To use Master Control Menu,  
Click on [Online Document], [Setup] or [Quit], or  
Click the right mouse button on Master Control Menu window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14 Installing and Using Utilities  
CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR  
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool to create [Configuration Diskette] that is used for  
configuring the server with the Express Setup (see Chapter 5 for details).  
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette  
Creator to operate the setup, you can setup from the installation of OS to several utilities  
automatically except for a few key input to confirm the specification. Also, you can install the  
system with the same specification as before when re-installing the system. We recommend you to  
create [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
IMPORTANT: You can not create [Configuration Diskette] for  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
NOTE: You can install Windows Server 2003 without [Configuration  
Diskette]. Also, you can modify/newly create [Configuration Diskette]  
during the setup with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Creating Configuration Diskette  
This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for OS installation and  
creating [Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.  
NOTE: In the procedure below, the folder name that is specified when  
installing Trekking command is assumed as [Configuration Diskette  
Creator].  
1. Start the OS.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu will appear.  
3. Right-click on the screen or left-click [Setup]. The menu will appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-15  
4. Click [Configuration Diskette Creator].  
Configuration Diskette Creator window is displayed.  
5. Click [Create New Information files] from the [File] menu.  
The [Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.  
6. Specify each item and click [OK].  
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Basic  
Information] dialog box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-16 Installing and Using Utilities  
7. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].  
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.  
When completing the specification of setup information, the [Save Setup Information]  
dialog box will appear.  
8. Confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for  
the Setup File in [File Name].  
9. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].  
Now [Configuration Diskette] has been created. [Configuration Diskette] is used when  
you install Windows Server 2003. Put a label and keep it where it will not be lost.  
NOTE: For the information on the contents of each specifying item,  
refer to the Help.  
If you want to modify the information file that already exists, click [Modify information  
files] on Configuration Diskette Creator window. Refer to the Help to modify the inf file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-17  
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver  
To install optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by the Express Setup, follow the procedure  
below to create [Configuration Diskette].  
1. Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.  
2. From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].  
[Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.  
3. Specify each item and click on [OK].  
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Disk  
Environment] dialog box.  
4. Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on [Next].  
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.  
5. When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for mass storage  
device].  
6. When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the  
[Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for the Setup File in  
[File Name].  
7. Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-18 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC ESMPRO  
The NEC ESMPRO lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network. NEC  
ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations, failures, and performance. With  
log data collected by NEC ESMPRO, a system administrator can track long-term and short-term  
performance, monitor server usage, create graphs to record trends, and check server failure rates.  
The administrator can use the information collected to create more efficient data routing procedures  
and optimize server usage.  
Functions and Features  
The NEC ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a  
network. These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation, system  
extension, and transfer tasks. Some features of NEC ESMPRO Manager include:  
Hardware and software server configuration  
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the CPU, memory, disks, disk arrays,  
and LAN boards.  
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each  
server.  
Server failures  
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type,  
location, cause, and suggested corrective action.  
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature,  
memory failure, crashes, and software failure information.  
Performance  
– NEC ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen  
and displays information, such as the rate of CPU load, memory usage, disk usage, and  
LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and  
prevent server overloads.  
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online  
document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-19  
Web-based Promise Array Manager  
Web-based Promise Array Manager is a RAID management utility for monitoring SATA2 RAID  
controller.  
Refer to online documentation (pdf format) contained in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM for  
detailed explanation.  
MegaRAID Storage Manager (Server)  
MegaRAID Storage Manager (hereinafter abbreviated to MSM) is an application to manage or  
monitor the N8103-99 disk array controller (0ch), N8103-90 disk array controller (for external SAS  
hard disk drives) or N8103-91 disk array controller (for internal SAS hard disk drives). You can use  
MSM for management of arrays and error notification by event monitoring while the system is  
running.  
Before attempting to operate MSM, read the "MegaRAID Storage Manager User's Guide" contained  
in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. The manual explains the MSM installation procedure and  
notes on operating MSM.  
Setup with Express Setup  
You can install MSM with Express Setup contained in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. When  
you start the Express Setup, a dialog to specify an application appears. Select [MSM] on the dialog.  
Manual Setup  
See the online document "MegaRAID Storage Manager User's Guide contained in NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM for details.  
MegaRAID Storage Manager (Management PC)  
Install this utility to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager (hereinafter abbreviated to MSM) via  
network.  
Before attempting to operate MSM, read the "MegaRAID Storage Manager User's Guide" contained  
in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. The manual explains the MSM installation procedure and  
notes on operating MSM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-20 Installing and Using Utilities  
Power Console Plus  
Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system of the disk array controller (MegaRAID  
controller) produced by LSI Logic. Use of Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g., monitoring  
and maintenance) of RAID systems that are constructed on local NEC Express servers and NEC  
Express servers connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on  
graphical screens without the system being stopped.  
Major Functions  
Power Console Plus has the following features:  
Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration  
Enabling the change of RAID levels  
Being compatible with SAF-TE  
Supporting the performance monitor  
Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring, and  
fan monitoring  
Enabling the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive  
Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration  
Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate  
Components  
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:  
SNMP Agent  
This function is not yet supported. Do not install SNMP Agent.  
MegaRAID Service Monitor  
Enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs.  
Install MegaRAID Service Monitor in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID  
controller is mounted.  
MegaRAID Client  
Controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the NEC  
Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that  
is connected through the NEC Express server and network.  
MegaRAID Server  
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID Server in  
the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-21  
MegaRAID Registration Server  
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install in one of NEC  
Express servers and management PCs that are connected through network. The above  
components must be installed correctly for establishing the environment to use Power  
Console Plus.  
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and  
management PC.  
Server:  
NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted  
Install the following three components in this server:  
– MegaRAID Service Monitor  
– MegaRAID Server  
– MegaRAID Client  
Management PC:  
Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network (TCP/IP)  
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4.0  
Terminal Server Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC component.  
Management PC does not guarantee operation on Client, which used Terminal Server,  
Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.  
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after the Power On machine that installed  
"Server" and "Management Server".  
Install the following component in this PC:  
– MegaRAID Client  
Management server:  
Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs  
Install the following component in one of the servers or management PCs:  
– MegaRAID Registration Server  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-22 Installing and Using Utilities  
Server Setup  
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID  
controller is mounted.  
Operating Environment  
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a  
server.  
Hardware  
– Machine:  
NEC Express5800 series connected with the AMI disk array controller (A)  
– Memory:  
Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more  
– Free space of the hard disk drive:  
5MB or more  
– Display unit:  
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger  
– Required peripheral equipment:  
Network Interface card  
CD-ROM unit  
Pointing device such as a mouse  
Software  
– Microsoft Windows NT version 4.0  
(Windows NT Version 4.0 Service Pack 6a or later + Internet Explorer 5.5 or later)  
– Microsoft Windows 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing and Using Utilities 6-23  
Management PC Setup  
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network  
(TCP/IP).  
Operating Environment  
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a  
management PC.  
Hardware  
– Machine:  
NEC Express5800 series  
PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a CPU at least equivalent  
to it)  
– Memory:  
Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more  
– Free space of the hard disk drive:  
5 MB or more  
– Display unit:  
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger  
– Required peripheral equipment:  
Network Interface card  
CD-ROM unit  
Pointing device such as a mouse  
Software  
– Microsoft Windows NT Version 4.0  
(Windows NT Version 4.0 Service Pack 5 or later + Internet Explorer 4.01 Service  
Pack 2 or later)  
– Microsoft Windows 2000  
– Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-24 Installing and Using Utilities  
NEC DianaScope  
The NEC DianaScope is software for the remote management of this server.  
See the online documents for details on the functions and installation of NEC DianaScope.  
NOTE: You need the server license to activate DianaScope for this  
product. The server license below is attached to this product.  
DianaScope Additional Server License (1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Maintenance  
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or  
storing the server.  
MAKING BACKUP COPIES  
NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disk drives of the  
server on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools,  
consult with your service representative.  
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System  
Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup  
copy of the system information.  
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array  
configuration. When your hard disk drives have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is  
recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data. To make a backup copy of the  
configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on the  
optional disk array controller board. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7-2 Maintenance  
CLEANING  
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages  
1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Do not look into the DVD-ROM drive.  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-3  
Cleaning the Server  
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the  
procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:  
IMPORTANT:  
To avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not use  
volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server.  
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of  
server, and the inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten  
them with water.  
1. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
2. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
3. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.  
4. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and  
squeeze it firmly.  
5. Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.  
6. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, wipe the server with it once again.  
7. Wipe the server with a dry cloth.  
8. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4 Maintenance  
Cleaning the Interior  
CAUTION  
The qualified service representative can only install or remove the components  
described in this subsection. To avoid personal injury or electrical shock, contact  
your service representative when your need to install/remove the internal  
components.  
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of  
the interior of the server, especially around the mother board.  
Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a  
buildup can prevent proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server  
components. Also, dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials that can cause short circuits  
or corrosion of electrical contacts.  
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is  
located. For most office environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months. For  
more severe environments, clean the interior every 6 months.  
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover.  
You will need a small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection),  
computer grade canned air, and a small brush for cleaning the interior.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.  
WARNING  
Unplug all power cords.  
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is  
present inside the server and display unit even after the power is turned off.  
All voltage is removed only when the power cord is unplugged.  
IMPORTANT: Do not use the brush made of chemical fabric, or the  
cleaning material that will generate an electrostatics.  
1. Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.  
2. Remove the left side cover. (See Chapter 9.)  
3. Remove the dust accumulate on the air inlet of the front and the rear fan.  
4. Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the mother board.  
5. Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the mother board.  
6. Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the  
interior of the server.  
7. Reinstall the left side cover. (See Chapter 9.)  
8. Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-5  
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse  
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp  
goes off), and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth.  
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the  
mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the  
mouse regularly:  
1. Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and  
cotton swabs.  
2. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
3. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove  
it.  
4. Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and turn  
your hand holding the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward). The  
mouse ball is released onto your palm.  
Mouse ball  
Mouse ball cover  
Roller  
Bottom View  
5. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and  
squeeze it firmly.  
6. Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in  
Step 5.  
7. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.  
8. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe  
stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.  
9. Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.  
10. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.  
11. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6 Maintenance  
Cleaning Disc  
A dusty disc or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and disc regularly:  
1. Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP LED is lit).  
2. Press the CD tray Open/Close button on the front of the DVD-ROM drive.  
The tray opens.  
3. Hold the disc lightly and take it out from the tray.  
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the disc with your hand.  
4. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the DVD-ROM drive. Doing  
so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.  
5. Push on the tray front to close the tray.  
6. Wipe the signal side of the disc with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Wipe disc from the center to the outside. Use only disc  
cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a disc with record spray/cleaner, benzene,  
or thinner causes damage to the disc contents. At worst, inserting the  
disc into the server may cause failure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-7  
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS  
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.  
Select [Tools] - [System Diagnostics] in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the system.  
Test Items  
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.  
Memory  
CPU cache memory  
Hard disk drive used as a system  
IMPORTANT: When executing the system diagnostics, make sure to  
disconnect the LAN cable. Executing the system diagnostics with the  
LAN cable connected, the network may be influenced.  
NOTE: On checking the hard disk drive, no data is written into the  
disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8 Maintenance  
Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics  
There are two ways to diagnose the server: to use the local console (keyboard) of the server itself,  
and to use the management PC via serial port (remote console).  
IMPORTANT: Two methods of LAN and the serial port are mentioned  
in "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" of Chapter 6 "Installing and Using  
Utilities" in the way of communicating in remote console.  
Use the serial port to execute System Diagnostics with remote console.  
The LAN connection is not for System Diagnostics.  
Procedures to start the diagnostics program are as follows:  
1. Shutdown the OS, and power off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.  
2. Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.  
3. Plug the power cord and power on the server.  
4. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to start the system.  
The step which the step which local console of the server is used for, and remote console  
are used for is different. Refer to "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" of Chapter 6 "Installing  
and Using Utilities", to start the system properly. The following menu is displayed on the  
screen, when starting the system from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Local console  
Remote console  
5. Select [Tools].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-9  
6. Select [System Diagnostics].  
The system diagnostics starts and will be completed in approximately three minutes.  
When the diagnostics is completed, the screen of the display changes as shown below:  
Diagnostics tool title  
Test window title  
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)  
Test result  
Test End  
Start 10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00  
Test End : NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00  
<System>  
MEM  
CACHE  
<SCSI>  
Memory  
Cache  
16 count  
49 count  
NormalEnd  
NormalEnd  
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W  
89 count  
NormalEnd  
[Enter] Detail Information [ESC] Return to Enduser Menu  
Guide line  
Test summary window  
– Diagnostics tool title  
Shows the name and version of the diagnostic tool.  
– Test window title  
Shows the progress of the diagnostics. "Test End" is displayed when the diagnostics  
completes.  
– Test result  
Shows the start, end, and elapsed time and completion status of the diagnostics.  
– Guide line  
Shows the details of the keys to operate window.  
– Test summary window  
Shows the results of each test that executed the diagnostics. Move the cursor and  
press the Enter key on the cursor line to display the details of the test.  
When an error is detected by the system diagnostics, the relevant test result in the test  
Summary window is highlighted in red, and "Abnormal End" is displayed in the result on  
the right side.  
Move the cursor to the test that detected the error, and press the Enter key. Record the  
error message that has been output to the Detail Information screen and contact your  
service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-10 Maintenance  
7. Follow the guide line shown at the bottom of the screen, and press the Esc key.  
The [Enduser Menu] below is displayed.  
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)  
Enduser Menu  
<Test Result>  
<Device List>  
<Log Info>  
<Option>  
<Reboot>  
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.  
<Test Result> Shows the diagnostics completion screen of the above diagnostics.  
<Device List> Shows a list of connected devices.  
<Log Info>  
Shows the log information of the diagnostics. It can be saved on a floppy  
disk.  
To save it on a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk to the floppy  
disk drive, and select <Save(F)>.  
<Option>  
<Reboot>  
Optional features can be used from this menu.  
Reboots the system.  
8. Select <Reboot> in the [Enduser Menu] above.  
The server restarts and the system is started from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
9. Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM  
drive.  
10. Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.  
11. Reconnect all the LAN cables that have been disconnected in Step 2 to the server.  
12. Plug in the power cord.  
This completes the system diagnostics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 7-11  
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER  
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the  
server plugged to a power source.  
IMPORTANT:  
If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in the floor  
layout to a great extent, contact your service representative.  
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard  
disk drive, if any.  
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disk drives to relocated the  
server if the contains any.  
1. Take a media out of the server, if any.  
2. Power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).  
3. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
4. Remove all the cables from the server.  
5. Hold the server by its bottom to carry the server.  
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the front mask to lift the server. The front  
mask may be disengaged from the server, causing personal injury.  
6. Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-12 Maintenance  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Troubleshooting  
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.  
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is  
recommended to install the Off-line Maintenance Utility, NEC  
ESMPRO, to the server and client computers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8-2 Troubleshooting  
SYSTEM VIEWERS  
Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.  
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language  
PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of  
NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
[Example]  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-3  
LAMPS  
The following describes lamps on the server and their indications. See Chapter 2 for each location.  
SAS model  
SATA model  
Access lamp  
POWER/SLEEP  
lamp  
DISK Access lamp  
Disk lamp  
FRONT  
REAR  
LINK/ACT lamp  
1000/100/10 lamp  
LINK/ACT lamp  
100/10 lamp  
REAR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4 Troubleshooting  
POWER/SLEEP Lamp  
The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered.  
When the server is off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep  
mode). If the OS supports the power-saving mode, pressing the POWER/SLEEP switch blinks the  
POWER/SLEEP lamp in green and places the server in the power-saving mode. Press the  
POWER/SLEEP switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP lamp and place the server back in the  
normal mode.  
The power-saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power-saving feature. Some  
OS's allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is  
made to the server for a certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.  
Access Lamps  
The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the DVD-ROM drive light when access is made to a  
media in the drive.  
DISK Access Lamp  
The DISK access lamp indicates the state of hard disk drive.  
This lamp lights in green every time any of such hard disk drive is accessed.  
IMPORTANT: To indicate the access states of the built-in hard disk  
drives when optional board (e.g., disk mirroring controller or disk array  
controller) is installed, connect the LED cable provided with the server  
to the LED connector on the mother board and the optional board.  
LINK/ACT Lamp  
The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the server. If  
the power is supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other, the  
lamp is lit green (LINK state). If information is transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks  
green (ACT state).  
If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection. If the  
lamp is not lit still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected. Contact your  
service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-5  
1000/100/10 Lamp  
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether each of the network ports normally equipped with the  
server is operated through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If the  
lamp is lit orange, the network port is operated through 1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the  
network port is operated through 100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated  
through 10BASE-T.  
100/10 Lamp  
The 100/10 indicates whether the management LAN port is operated through the 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T network interface. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through  
100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.  
Hard Disk Drive Lamp  
The optional hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bay can contain four 1-inch height hard disk drives.  
Each hard disk drive has a DISK lamp on its front panel.  
DISK lamp  
The DISK lamp indicates the drive status as follows.  
Lighting green  
The hard disk drive is installed and powered on.  
Blinking green  
Indicates that the hard disk drive is accessed.  
Lighting amber  
Indicates that the installed hard disk drive is defected.  
NOTE: While hard disk drives are in the disk array configuration  
(RAID1 or RAID5), a single failed hard disk drive does not affect the  
operation of the server. However, it is recommended to replace the  
failed hard disk drive and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the hard disk  
drives as soon as possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed hard disk  
drive.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6 Troubleshooting  
Slowly blinking amber  
Indicates that the hard disk drive is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If the  
defected hard disk drive is replaced with a new one in the disk array configuration, the  
data is automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function).  
The lamp goes on green when the rebuild is terminated normally. The lamp goes on amber  
if the rebuild fails.  
IMPORTANT: To abort rebuilding, power off the server. In such a  
case, restart the server, hot-swap the failed hard disk drive, and restart  
rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the auto-rebuild feature.  
Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off before  
rebuilding hard disk drives, the auto-rebuild feature will not start.)  
When you removed a hard disk drive, wait at least 90 seconds  
before installing the hard disk drive back again.  
Do not replace another hard disk drive while rebuilding is in  
progress.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-7  
ERROR MESSAGES  
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.  
Error Messages after Power-on  
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On Self-  
Test). When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the display  
unit.  
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware  
failure, use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a  
keyboard controller error and stop processing.  
Immediately after the server is powered  
Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction  
(simultaneous key entry of Ctrl + Alt + Delete)  
Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction  
During hardware initialization following restart of the POST  
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason, restart the server once again. If  
the same error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure normal  
operation of the server, however, make sure to follow the following restrictions.  
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on  
the screen following the server power-on.  
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the  
Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before  
contacting your service representative. The alarm indication would be a  
great help for maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8 Troubleshooting  
POST Error Messages  
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The following  
table lists error codes, error messages, and actions to take.  
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before  
consulting with your service representative. Alarm messages are useful  
information for maintenance.  
Error  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
code  
0200  
0210  
0211  
Failure Fixed Disk.  
Stuck Key.  
Keyboard error  
Contact your service representative.  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
0213  
0220  
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch.  
Release the lock of the key switch. If the error  
cannot be corrected in spite of the release of  
the lock, contact your service representative.  
Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be  
corrected in spite of the start of SETUP,  
contact your service representative.  
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run  
SETUP.  
0230  
0231  
0232  
0250  
System RAM Failed at offset.  
Shadow Ram Failed at offset.  
Extended RAM Failed at address line.  
System battery is dead - Replace and run  
SETUP.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the battery. (After restarting the computer, start  
the SETUP to provide the setting again.)  
0251  
System CMOS checksum bad - Default  
configuration used.  
The default values have just been set. Start  
the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the  
error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
0252  
Password checksum bad - Passwords  
cleared.  
The password has just been cleared. Start the  
SETUP to provide the setting again.  
0260  
0270  
0271  
System timer error.  
Real time clock error.  
Check date and time setting.  
Start the SETUP to set the date and time  
again. If the same error occurs successively in  
spite of the resetting, contact your service  
representative.  
02D0  
System cache error - Cache disabled.  
The cache cannot be used. Contact your  
service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-9  
Error  
code  
02D1  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching Contact your service representative.  
limit.  
02F4  
02F5  
02F6  
02F7  
0B22  
0B28  
0B29  
EISA CMOS not write able.  
DMA Test Failed.  
Software NMI Failed.  
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.  
CPUs are installed out of order.  
Unsupported CPU detected on CPU Slot 1. Make sure that the server supports the CPU. If  
Request the maintenance to replace the CPU.  
you are not sure, contact your service  
representative to request the maintenance.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the fan.  
Unsupported CPU detected on CPU Slot 2.  
0B30  
0B31  
0B32  
0B5F  
Fan 1 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 2 Alarm occurred.  
Fan 3 Alarm occurred.  
Forced to use Processor with error  
Because an error is detected in every CPU,  
the system is forcibly started. Contact your  
service representative.  
0B60  
0B61  
0B62  
0B63  
0B64  
0B65  
0B70  
DIMM group #1 has been disabled  
DIMM group #2 has been disabled  
DIMM group #3 has been disabled  
DIMM group #4 has been disabled  
DIMM group #5 has been disabled  
DIMM group #6 has been disabled  
The error occurred during temperature  
sensor reading.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
0B71  
0B74  
System Temperature out of the range.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the fan.  
Contact your service representative.  
The error occurred during voltage sensor  
reading.  
0B75  
0B80  
0B81  
0B82  
0B83  
0B8A  
System voltage out of the range.  
BMC Memory Test Failed.  
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.  
BMC core Hardware failure.  
BMC 1BF or 0BF check failed.  
BMC SEL area full.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
start the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service representative.  
Start SETUP and select [Server] - [Event Log  
Configuration] - [Clear All Error Logs] and  
press Enter to clear event logs.  
0B8B  
0B8C  
0B8D  
0B8E  
0B8F  
BMC progress check timeout.  
BMC command access failed.  
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy -  
Could not redirect the console - BMC Error -  
Could not redirect the console - BMC  
Parameter Error -  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
start the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service representative.  
0B90  
0B91  
BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.  
BMC update firmware corrupted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10 Troubleshooting  
Error  
code  
Error message  
Recommended Action  
0B92  
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.  
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power  
once and then on again to restart the server. If  
the error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
0B93  
0B94  
BMC SDR Repository empty.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
restart the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service representative.  
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power  
once and then on again to restart the server. If  
the error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
IPMB signal lines do not respond.  
0B95  
BMC FRU device failure.  
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power  
once and then on again to restart the server. If  
the error cannot be corrected, contact your  
service representative.  
0B96  
0B97  
0B98  
0B99  
0B9A  
BMC SDR Repository failure.  
BMC SEL device failure.  
BMC RAM test error.  
BMC Fatal hardware error.  
Management controller not responding.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
start the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service representative.  
Update the RMC firmware. If the error cannot  
be corrected, contact your service  
representative.  
0B9B  
0B9C  
0B9D  
0B9E  
0B9F  
0BB0  
0BB1  
8100  
8101  
8102  
8103  
8104  
8105  
8160  
Private I2C bus not responding.  
BMC internal exception.  
BMC A/D timeout error.  
SDR repository corrupt.  
SEL corrupt.  
SMBIOS – SROM data read error.  
SMBIOS – SROM data checksum bad.  
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #1.  
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #2.  
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #3.  
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #4.  
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #5.  
Memory Error detected in DIMM group #6.  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 1.  
Turn off the power once and then on again to  
start the server. If the error cannot be  
corrected, contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the DIMM in the relevant group.  
Contact your service representative.  
8161  
None  
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on  
Processor 2.  
Expansion ROM not initialized – PCI Mass  
Disable initialization of the optional device  
Storage Controller in slot xx (xx: slot number) expansion ROM by using the BIOS SETUP  
utility (see Chapter 4).  
Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to  
configure the optional remote management  
card (see Chapter 6).  
H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.  
!! Update BMC F/W Configuration by  
configuration tool !!  
!! Refer to BMC configuration manual !!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-11  
Beep Codes  
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.  
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For example, the  
beep interval 1-3-1-1 indicates 1 beep, pause, 3 beeps, pause, 1 beep, pause, and 1 beep notifying  
that the DRAM refresh test error occurred.  
Beep code  
Description  
Recommended action  
3-3  
(repetitive)  
ROM checksum error  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the mother board.  
1-2-2-3  
1-3-1-1  
DRAM refresh test error  
Keyboard controller error  
Check if the DIMMs are properly connected. If  
the error persists, contact your service  
representative to replace DIMM or mother  
board.  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.  
If the error persists, contact your service  
representative to replace the mother board.  
Check if the DIMMs are properly connected. If  
the error persists, contact your service  
representative to replace DIMM or mother  
board.  
1-3-1-3  
1-3-3-1  
No memory or capacity check  
error  
DRAM address error  
DRAM test Low Byte error  
DRAM test High Byte error  
CPU startup error  
1-3-4-1  
1-3-4-3  
1-4-1-1  
1-5-1-1  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the mother board.  
1-5-2-1  
No CPU installed  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the CPU or mother board.  
2-1-2-3  
2-2-3-1  
1-2  
BIOS ROM copyright test error  
Unexpected interrupt test error  
Option ROM initialization error  
Contact your service representative to replace  
the mother board.  
Check if BIOS SETUP is correctly configured.  
If an expansion of Option ROM for additionally  
installed PCI board is not displayed, check if  
the PCI board is properly installed. If the error  
persists, contact your service representative to  
replace the mother board or PCI board.  
NOTE: Beep code 1-5-4-2 informs you that AC power supply is  
interrupted due to power failure or momentary voltage drop and the  
system is restarted. This is not an error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12 Troubleshooting  
SOLVING PROBLEMS  
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow  
the instruction given before asking for repair.  
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the on-  
screen message and contact your service representative.  
Problems with NEC Express Server  
No screen display appears and beep occurs.  
T Is the DIMM board installed securely?  
Check whether the DIMM board is inserted into the mating connector securely.  
Make sure the jumper switches have been returned to their original positions after  
CMOS clearing. See "Configuring Mother Board Jumpers" in Chapter 4 for the  
positions of the jumper switches.  
Fail to power on the server:  
T Is the server is properly supplied with power?  
Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the  
power specifications for the server.  
Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs.  
Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.  
If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it  
outputs power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.  
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS  
Setup utility of the server.  
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [AC-LINK]>  
T Did you press the POWER/SLEEP switch?  
Press the POWER/SLEEP switch on the front of the server to turn on the power  
(the POWER/SLEEP lamp lights).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-13  
POST fails to complete:  
T Is the DIMM board installed?  
Check the installation location of DIMMs (see Chapter 9).  
T Is the memory size large?  
The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for a  
while.  
T Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the  
server?  
If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST  
may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding. In such  
a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard or mouse  
operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the server.  
T Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?  
Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.  
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):  
T Are cables properly connected?  
Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also  
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.  
T Is the power-on order correct?  
When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external  
devices first, then the server.  
T Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?  
Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that  
comes with the device to install its driver.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O port address  
or operation mode settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for  
details to make correct settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14 Troubleshooting  
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:  
T Is the cable properly connected?  
Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the  
server.  
The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is  
powered (not applicable to USB devices). Power of the server first and connect it  
properly.  
T Are the server drivers installed?  
Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and  
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.) Some  
OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that  
comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct.  
Fail to access to the DVD/CD-ROM:  
T Is the DVD/CD-ROM properly set in the DVD-ROM drive tray?  
The tray is provided with a holder to secure the DVD/CD-ROM. Make sure that  
the DVD/CD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.  
T Is the DVD/CD-ROM applicable to the server?  
The DVD/CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.  
For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a  
disk with the DVD drive is not guaranteed.  
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes on when the power cord is connected:  
When the server receives an AC power after the power cord is connected, the  
POWER/SLEEP lamp goes on. This is a normal operation of the server, not a fault.  
The lamp will go off when DC power is turned on, and then off.  
Inserted the correct DVD/CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed:  
The DVD/CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong DVD/CD-ROM is inserted.  
Please insert the correct DVD/CD-ROM.  
OK  
T Is the data side of the DVD/CD-ROM dirty or injured?  
Take the DVD/CD-ROM out of the DVD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty  
or injured, reset and click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-15  
Fail to access the hard disk drive:  
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)  
T Is the hard disk drive applicable to the server?  
Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.  
T Is the hard disk drive properly installed?  
See Chapter 9.  
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:  
T Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?  
Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.  
T Is the cable connection changed?  
See Chapter 10 for cable connection.  
T Are SCSI devices properly configured?  
When the server has external SCSI devices connected, hard disk drive settings,  
including SCSI ID and terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes  
with the SCSI device for details.  
T Is cable length exceeded?  
Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details.  
T Are the optional SCSI controllers properly configured?  
Use the BIOS Setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to  
the SCSI connector on the mother board. When the server has an optional SCSI  
controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it, use the BIOS Setup utility  
that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper configuration. See the  
manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16 Troubleshooting  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows  
Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
Source:  
DCOM  
Error  
Category:  
Event ID:  
10016  
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation  
permission for the COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E-  
4E51-800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL  
SERVICE} SID {S-1-5-19}.  
This security permission can be modified using the component Services  
administrative tool.  
It is not a problem in operating the system.  
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows  
Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
Event Source: Service Control Manager  
Event Type:  
Event ID:  
Error  
7011  
Description:  
Timeout (30000 milliseconds) waiting for a transaction response from the  
IMAP4Svc service.  
When this event is not registered by rebooting the system, it is not a problem in  
operating the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-17  
Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2  
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you operate Windows Server  
2003 R2.  
Source:  
Type:  
IPMIDRV  
Error  
Event ID: 1001  
Description: The IPMI device driver attempted to determine if the system supported an  
IPMI BMC device. The driver attempted to detect the presence of the IPMI  
BMC by searching the SMBIOS for Type 38 record. But either no record was  
found or the record was not compatible with the version of the device driver.  
If a SMBIOS Type 38 record was detected, the Dump Data field of the event  
contains a binary representation of the record.  
If you use "Hardware Management" which is provided by Windows Server 2003  
R2, above-shown event log will be registered.  
For more details, refer to "Enabling Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2  
Hardware Management" on the following site.  
[NEC Express5800 Web Site]  
http://www.nec.co.jp/express/download/W2K3_R2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18 Troubleshooting  
Problems with Windows Server 2003  
The system displays the message below and fails to log on.  
Windows Product Activation  
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can  
continue. You cannot log on until you activate Windows.  
To shut down the computer, click Cancel.  
YES  
NO  
Cancel  
In Windows Server 2003, the above message will be displayed if you use the  
operating system without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and  
execute the procedure for license authentication.  
Cannot install the operating system correctly.  
T Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?  
See Chapter 6.  
During installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event Viewer:  
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0  
during the paging operation.  
There is no problem on this issue.  
Fail to start the OS:  
T Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive?  
Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.  
T Is the OS broken?  
Use recovery process to recover the system.  
The OS presents unstable operation:  
T Did you update the system?  
Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable  
operation. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system.  
(See Chapter 6.)  
The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is  
adjusted to automatically restarting:  
When the system does not restart automatically, restart it manually.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-19  
The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is NOT  
adjusted to automatically restarting:  
There is no problem about this issue.  
Check the System Event Log to confirm that STOP error occurred.  
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:  
If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced shutdown  
(forced shutdown: continue to press POWER/SLEEP switch for 4 seconds). The  
power will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds.  
The PXE boot (network boot) fails or the server is not found on the network:  
T Is the cable connected properly?  
Connect the proper cable to the network port on the rear of the Express server. In  
addition, make sure that the used cable conforms to the network interface  
standard.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS Setup utility of the  
server. Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility.  
T Have the protocol and service already configured?  
Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,  
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.  
T Is the transfer speed correct?  
Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the link speed  
and duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB.  
The Telnet Service is not installed.  
Adjust the computer name to 14 characters or less, and then install the Telnet Service  
according to <How to install the Telnet Service>.  
<How to install the Telnet Service>  
1. Click [Run] on Start menu.  
2. Type "tlntsvr /service" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].  
3. Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Computer Management] and then  
click the [Services] to specify whether the Telnet Service is registered.  
* When the installation of Telnet Service is finished, there is no problem if the computer  
name is set to 15 characters or more.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20 Troubleshooting  
Wake-On-LAN Function  
The Remote Power ON/OFF function (Wake-On-LAN) is disabled immediately after the AC power  
is turned on.  
Start Windows 2003 once, perform the steps below, and then shut down the system. After restart, the  
Remote Power On/Off function is enabled unless the AC power is turned off.  
1. Select [Start] - [Administrative Tools] - [Computer Management].  
2. Select [Device Manager] - [Network Adapter], and double-click [Intel(R) PRO/1000 EB  
Network Connection with I/O Acceleration #n]. Set as follows in the [Detail] tab.  
PME:  
[ON]  
Wake On: [Magic Packet]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-21  
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:  
T Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server?  
If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the  
server, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.  
T Is BIOS configuration correct?  
The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server.  
Use the BIOS Setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system  
from the DVD-ROM drive first.  
<Menu to check: [Boot]>  
T Is an error message appeared?  
When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, the  
following message appears. After this message appears, check the error and take  
the appropriate corrective action according to the message listed in the table  
below.  
Message  
Cause and Remedy  
This machine is not supported.  
This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not  
designed for this server. Execute the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server.  
Hard disk access error  
The hard disk drive is not connected or it is  
failed.  
Check whether the hard disk drive is correctly  
connected.  
NvRAM access error  
An access to the nonvolatile memory  
(NvRAM) is not acceptable.  
The system-specific information  
The system-specific information can't be  
does not exist on the baseboard. acquired in the mother board exchange and  
Please restore the backup data  
or write the data by using  
[System Information  
so on.  
Management] of the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility. Only the  
authorized personnel are allowed  
to do this operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-22 Troubleshooting  
Problems with Express Setup  
Express Setup can not be used  
Express Setup does not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
x64 Editions.  
If you want to perform re-setup, see Appendix D and perform "Manual Setup".  
Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk drive  
that has smaller capacity than the specified partition size:  
The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk.  
The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.  
Setup will continue the process.  
OK  
It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.  
The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD-ROM or checking  
CD-ROM:  
Press R. When the message appears again even if you press R, restart the Express  
Setup from the beginning. In case the same result occurred after the restart of  
installation, contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them to check the DVD-  
ROM drive.  
Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.  
There are some errors on the specified setup information.  
Follow the instruction to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the  
installation.  
[OK] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.  
If you click [OK] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup for the  
later specification to continue the process.  
<The Default Value for Windows Server 2003>  
The specification of network protocol  
Protocol :  
Service :  
Client :  
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]  
Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer.  
Microsoft network client.  
Component :  
Application :  
SNMP  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
MegaRAID Storage Manager (When disk array system)  
Power Console Plus (When disk array system)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-23  
[OK] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.  
The [OK] does not appear if the Setup File that has already been created is loaded.  
[OK] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen. Once you  
go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [OK] will not appear even if you  
enter [Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.  
Select [Use Existing Partition] at [System Partition], but the OS is installed in the whole area of  
the disk.  
Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance area)?  
If the partition other than the one to re-use does not exist, the setup will reserve the  
whole area of the disk to install operating system.  
Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.  
When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the  
system as Workgroup. Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain.  
Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.  
Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start.  
However, the setup will stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in this  
case, input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup completed during  
Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem on Windows  
setup.  
Unable to specify the details of Network adapter.  
In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specify them  
from Control Panel after starting Windows.  
Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for each adapter,  
but all the protocols are specified on either adapter.  
It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used.  
The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by  
default value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-24 Troubleshooting  
When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP  
protocol are all set to use DHCP.  
When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of the  
protocol may all be set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.  
Not more than two Network adapter is connected, but the detailed specification of the protocol  
are all set by default.(e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP is specified)  
Are you specifying more than two protocols?  
In this case, the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network  
adapter, so the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default.  
Re-specify the details from Control Panel after starting the OS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-25  
Problems with Disk Array Configuration  
Check the following if the server configuring a disk array does not operate properly or a utility does  
not operate correctly. If a relevant item is found, follow the processing method.  
Fail to install the OS:  
T Is the disk array controller configured?  
Provide proper configuration for the disk array controller by using the LSI Logic  
Software RAID Setup Utility.  
Fail to start the OS:  
T Is the BIOS of the disk array controller changed?  
Set the BIOS correctly by using the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility.  
T Does POST recognize the disk array controller?  
After making sure that the disk array controller is connected correctly, then power  
on the server.  
If the disk array controller is not recognized correctly despite correct connection,  
the disk array controller may be failed. Contact your service representative.  
Rebuild fails:  
T Is the capacity of the hard disk drive to be rebuilt sufficient?  
The hard disk drive to be rebuilt should have the same capacity of the failed had  
disk drive.  
T Is RAID0 configured?  
RAID0 has no data redundancy, therefore, Rebuild is disabled in the RAID0  
configuration. Replace the failed hard disk drive, create the configuration data  
again and initialize the hard disk drives. Then recover the data by using backup  
data.  
Auto rebuild fails:  
T Was a sufficient time taken for hot swap of hard disk drives?  
To allow the auto rebuild to operate correctly, it should take 90 seconds or longer  
for the interval between the removal of the failed hard disk drive and the  
installation of a new hard disk drive.  
T Is configuration correct?  
Check the setting of auto rebuild by using the LSI Logic Software RAID Setup  
Utility. <Menus to check: Top menu - [Objects] - [Adapter] - [Auto Rebuild]>  
A hard disk drive fails:  
Contact your service representative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-26 Troubleshooting  
Problems with Master Control Menu  
The master control menu fails to appear:  
T Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?  
The CD-ROM Autorun feature is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95.  
The older versions do not automatically start from the CD-ROM.  
T Is Shift pressed?  
Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.  
T Is the system in the proper state?  
The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing  
to set the CD-ROM. In such a case, start the Explorer and run \MC\1ST.EXE in  
the CD-ROM.  
Collecting Event Log  
This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server.  
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow  
the procedure below after restarting the system.  
1. Click [Management Tool] [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel.  
2. Select the type of the log to collect.  
On [Application Log], the events related to the running application is archived. On  
[Security Log], the events related to the security is archived. On [System Log], the events  
occurred at the item which configures Windows system is archived.  
3. Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.  
4. Input the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.  
5. Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and click [OK].  
For more information, refer to Windows Online Help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-27  
Collect Configuration Information  
This section describes on how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside  
specification.  
In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.  
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow  
the procedure below after restarting the system.  
1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.  
2. Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].  
The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.  
3. Click [System Tool] [System Information].  
4. Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.  
5. Input the file name to save in the [File Name] box.  
6. Click [Save].  
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information  
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the  
information can be specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 5.  
Memory Dump  
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.  
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the  
label. You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like. For more  
information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump (Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5 for  
detail)".  
IMPORTANT:  
Consult with your service representative before dumping the  
memory. Dumping the memory while the server is in the successful  
operation may affect the system operation.  
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message  
indicating insufficient virtual memory. Ignore this message and  
proceed. Restarting the system may result in dumping improper  
data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-28 Troubleshooting  
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When you are unable  
to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line Maintenance  
Utility can be used.  
IMPORTANT:  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your service  
representative. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the  
Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain  
a file that describes operation of the utility, but do not attempt to use  
the utility by yourself. Contact your service representative and  
follow instructions.  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a  
client to the server.  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.  
From the CD-ROM  
Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive and reboot the  
system.  
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance Utility".  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.  
From the floppy disk (by using an external floppy disk drive)  
Set the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the  
system.  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting "Tools" - "Create  
Support FD" on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Manual start (by pressing F4)  
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up screen of  
the server is on screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting 8-29  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features vary  
depending on the way you started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)  
IMPORTANT: See the on-line help for details of the Off-line  
Maintenance Utility. For further information, ask your service  
representative.  
IPMI Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and  
field replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.  
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.  
BIOS Setup Viewer  
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP  
utility to a text file.  
System Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to  
a text file.  
System Information Management  
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.  
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may not be  
restored.  
Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data.  
Start of Utilities  
With the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installed in the  
maintenance partition.  
– System Management  
– System Diagnostics  
– Maintenance Partition Update  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-30 Troubleshooting  
RESETTING THE SERVER  
If the server halts before starting the OS, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete. This restarts  
the server.  
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the  
data in process. To reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that  
no processing is in progress.  
FORCED SHUTDOWN  
Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server, the POWER/SLEEP switch  
does not turn off the server, or resetting does not work.  
Press and hold the POWER/SLEEP switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is  
forcibly turned off. To turn on the power back again, wait approximately 10 seconds after turning  
off the power (forced shutdown).  
Press here for at  
least 4 seconds.  
IMPORTANT:  
If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the power once to  
load the OS, and turn off the power again in the normal way.  
If the processor is heated excessively, the circuit for protecting  
expensive components is started. If so, the POWER/SLEEP switch  
cannot be used to control the power because the system is entered  
into the reset status. Pull out the power cord and turn off the power.  
After a while, check the operation environment (including the  
ambient temperature). Then connect the power cord and turn on the  
power. It may be necessary to leave the power-off status in the  
period until the processor is cooled sufficiently (about five minutes  
in normal).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Upgrading Your Server  
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or  
removing such optional devices, and notes on using them.  
IMPORTANT:  
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or  
removed by any user. However, NEC does not assume any liability  
for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the  
server resulted from installation by the user. NEC recommends you  
ask your service representative for installing or removing any  
optional devices.  
Use the options and cables approved by NEC. You will be charged  
by any repair of a malfunction, fault, or defect occurring in a server  
in which one or more component not approved by NEC are used.  
Always update the system if the hardware configuration is changed  
(See Chapter 5 for details).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9-2 Upgrading Your Server  
SAFETY NOTES  
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages  
1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Do not remove the lithium battery.  
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See  
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.  
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.  
Make sure to complete board installation.  
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.  
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-3  
STATIC PRECAUTIONS  
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other components.  
Electronic device can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, observe the  
following information.  
Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).  
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal  
part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your  
body.  
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static  
electricity.  
Select a suitable work space.  
– Work with the server on the anti-static or concrete floor.  
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be  
generated, make sure take anti-static measures beforehand.  
Use a work table.  
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.  
Clothe  
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.  
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.  
– Take off any jewels (a ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.  
Handling of components  
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it to the server.  
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.  
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4 Upgrading Your Server  
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL  
Prepare the installation or removal of a component depending on the following procedure:  
1. Shut down the OS or press the POWER/SLEEP switch to turn off the power of the server.  
(The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)  
2. Pull out the power cord from the AC inlet on the server.  
3. Remove all the cables connected to the server on the rear panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-5  
INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE  
Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure.  
Left Side Cover  
The left side cover should be removed to access to built-in devices in the server.  
Removal  
Remove the left side cover in the following procedure.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Unlock the left side cover if required.  
3. Fold the four stabilizers at the bottom of the server toward inside.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6 Upgrading Your Server  
4. Lay the server slowly and gently so that its right cover faces the floor.  
5. Remove the two screws from the rear of the server.  
Screws  
6. Hold the left side cover securely to remove it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-7  
Installation  
The side cover can be installed in the reverse procedure of the removal. Make sure that the hooks on  
the side cover are inserted into the frame holes of the server certainly. When you install the cover by  
sliding the cover toward the front of the server, also make sure that the hooks on the front side are  
engaged with the frame of the server. Otherwise, you will fail to install the cover securely.  
Hooks on top  
Holes  
Frame  
Hooks  
on  
front  
side  
Frame  
Lock plate  
Insert a lock plate here.  
Rear of the left side cover  
Frame of the server  
Finally, install the left side cover and secure it with two screws removed in step 5 of removal  
procedure.  
Screws  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8 Upgrading Your Server  
Front Mask  
The front mask must be removed to install or remove the hard disk drive and 5.25-inch device.  
Removal  
Follow the procedure below to remove the front mask.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the left side cover as described earlier in this chapter.  
3. Pull the release tabs (4) at the left end of the front mask toward you so that the tabs are  
removed from the frame of the server.  
IMPORTANT: If the tabs are pulled out toward you excessively, the  
hooks fixing the right end of the front mask will be damaged. Only pull  
out the tabs a little.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-9  
4. Remove the front mask to the right to release the tabs on the front mask from the chassis.  
Installation  
The front mask can be installed in the reverse order of the removal. Insert the four tabs at the right  
end of the front mask into the holes on the front of the server, push the left end of the front mask to  
the server, and lock the mask with the release tabs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-10 Upgrading Your Server  
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive (SAS Model)  
The hard disk drive bay may contain up to four hard disk drives.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not use any hard disk drive that is not authorized by NEC.  
Installing a third-party's hard drive may cause a failure in the server  
as well as the hard disk drive. Repair of any failure or damage in the  
server caused by such a hard disk drive will be charged.  
The SAS hard disk drives installed can be used either as a single  
disk or a Software RAID drive configured by jumper switch setting  
on mother board.  
HDD cage  
Hard disk drive (Fourth)  
Hard disk drive (Third)  
Hard disk drive (Second)  
Hard disk drive (First)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-11  
Setting SAS Software  
Set the SAS SWRAID jumper switch as shown in the figure below.  
When using as a single  
disk drive  
When using as a software  
RAID drive  
Use SETUP utility to configure the Software RAID (see Chapter 4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-12 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation  
Follow the procedure as described below to install 3.5-inch hard disk drives.  
1. Configure the operation mode of hard disk drives according to the manual supplied with  
the hard disk drive.  
Hard Disk Drive  
Bay to Install  
Bottom  
Lower middle  
Upper middle  
Top  
First hard disk drive  
Second hard disk drive  
Third hard disk drive  
Fourth hard disk drive  
SAS connector  
Mother board  
2. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
3. Fold the four stabilizers at the bottom of the server toward inside.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-13  
4. Lay the server so that its right cover faces the floor.  
Lay the server slowly and gently.  
5. Connect the SAS cable and power cable as shown in the figure below.  
SAS cable  
Power cable  
(2-pin connector)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-14 Upgrading Your Server  
6. Connect the SAS cable to the SAS connector.  
7. Install the left side cover.  
8. Raise the server and open the front mask.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-15  
9. Install the hot-plug SAS hard disk drives in the HDD cage.  
Fully open the lever of the hard disk drive and insert the drive into the HDD cage until it  
hits the depth of HDD cage.  
After the hard disk drive is fully inserted into the cage, close the lever to fix the drive. (A  
click occurs when it is locked.)  
IMPORTANT: Use the hard disk drive that is authorized by NEC.  
Consult with your service representative for available hard disk drive.  
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the hard disk drive tray before  
inserting the drive. See the figure below. Also make sure that the hooks  
of the hard disk drive are engaged with the frame of the HDD cage.  
1
2
NOTE: The slots of the HDD cage contain trays without hard disk  
drive. To install the hard disk drive, first remove the tray according to  
the removal procedure described later.  
Install a hard disk drive tray to the vacant slot of the cage to keep the  
cooling effect of the server.  
To remove the hard disk drive carrier, push the green tab on the lever and open the lever  
toward you until it stops. Then, the hard disk drive tray is unlocked.  
Securely hold the tray and the lever and insert the tray straight into the HDD cage.  
IMPORTANT: Removing more than one hard disk drive while the  
server is powered on destroys the logical disk. Remove or replace the  
hard disk drive one by one.  
10. Close the front mask.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-16 Upgrading Your Server  
Removal  
Follow the procedure as described below to remove 3.5-inch hard disk drives.  
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk drive  
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g.,  
customers' information or companies' management information) on the  
removed hard disk drive to any third parties.  
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or  
execute the "format" command of the operating system. However, the  
actual data remains written on the hard disk drive. Data not erased  
completely may be restored by special software and used for  
unexpected purposes.  
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available  
at stores) for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble  
explained above. For details on data erasure, ask your sales  
representative.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Open the front mask.  
3. Follow Step 10 of the installation procedure to remove the hard disk drive.  
1
2
4. Close the front mask.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-17  
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive (SATA Model)  
The hard disk drive bay may contain up to four hard disk drives.  
IMPORTANT: Do not use any hard disk drive that is not authorized  
by NEC. Installing a third-party's hard drive may cause a failure in the  
server as well as the hard disk drive. Repair of any failure or damage in  
the server caused by such a hard disk drive will be charged.  
Hard disk drive bay  
Hard disk drive (Fourth)  
Hard disk drive (Third)  
Hard disk drive (Second)  
Hard disk drive (First)  
Setting SATA Software RAID  
Run the system BIOS SETUP utility, select [Peripheral Configuration] - [SATA Controller Mode  
Option], and change parameter to [Enhanced] from factory-set [Compatible]. When the [SATA  
RAID] menu appears, select [Enabled] to use the SATA Software RAID feature.  
After restarting the system, POST displays the message prompting you to launch the Software  
RAID Utility. Run the utility according to the on-screen message. For RAID setting, see Chapter 4  
for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-18 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation  
Follow the procedure as described below to install 3.5-inch hard disk drives.  
1. Configure the operation mode of hard disk drives according to the manual supplied with  
the hard disk drive.  
Hard Disk Drive  
Bay to Install  
Bottom  
Lower middle  
Upper middle  
Top  
First hard disk drive  
Second hard disk drive  
Third hard disk drive  
Fourth hard disk drive  
Mother board  
SATA connector  
2. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-19  
3. Remove the left side cover according to the section "Front Mask" described earlier in this  
chapter and open the front mask.  
4. Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the hard disk drive if connected.  
5. Remove two screws on the front panel securing the hard disk drive carrier.  
6. Hold the lever and pull out the hard disk drive carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-20 Upgrading Your Server  
7. Place the removed hard disk drive on a flat and rigid place, and put the hard disk drive  
carrier over it.  
8. Align the screw holes of the hard disk drive with those of the hard disk drive bay and  
secure the hard disk drive with four screws (two each for right and left sides).  
IMPORTANT: Use the screws provided with the hard disk drive.  
Using screws longer than the required length may cause the hard disk  
drive to be damaged.  
9. Hold the lever of the hard disk drive carrier and insert it into the slot, then secure it with  
two screws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-21  
10. Provide the cable connections.  
See Chapter 10 for cable connections.  
NOTE: If caps are put on the SCSI interface and/or power cables,  
remove them. (Keep the removed caps for future use.) Put the mating  
caps on the unused power connectors and bundle the cables with a  
repeat tie.  
11. Assemble the server.  
12. Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that the hard disk drive is correctly recognized.  
See Chapter 4 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-22 Upgrading Your Server  
Removal  
Follow the procedure as described below to remove 3.5-inch hard disk drives.  
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk drive  
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g.,  
customers' information or companies' management information) on the  
removed hard disk drive to any third parties.  
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or  
execute the "format" command of the operating system. However, the  
actual data remains written on the hard disk drive. Data not erased  
completely may be restored by special software and used for  
unexpected purposes.  
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available  
at stores) for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble  
explained above. For details on data erasure, ask your sales  
representative.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the left side cover according to the section "Front Mask" described earlier in this  
chapter and open the front mask.  
3. Follow Steps 5 and 6 of the installation procedure to remove the hard disk drive carrier.  
4. Follow Step 8 of the installation procedure to remove the hard disk drive.  
5. Reassemble the server.  
Notes on Installing Additional Hard Disk Drives (SATA2)  
[N8150-204A/-205A/-206A/-207A/-208A/-209A]  
If you are using the additional hard disk drive (SATA2) [N8150-204A/-205A/-206A/-207A/-208A/-  
209A] in the server, the slot ID numbers indicated in the chassis do not correspond to the disk  
numbers displayed in Windows 2003 Disk Management. Be sure to confirm the disk numbers on the  
POST screen to ensure proper disk management and replacement.  
NOTE: To display the POST screen, press Esc while the NEC logo is  
being displayed on the screen after you power on the system. If the  
POST screen changes too fast, press Pause to hold the screen.  
Disk number in Windows 2003 Disk Management  
Slot ID number in the chassis  
(Disk number on the POST screen)  
Disk x1  
Disk x2  
Disk 0  
Disk 1  
Disk x3  
Disk 0  
Disk 2  
Disk 1  
Disk x4  
Disk 0  
Disk 2  
Disk 1  
Disk 3  
1 (Fixed Disk 0)  
2 (Fixed Disk 1)  
3 (Fixed Disk 2)  
4 (Fixed Disk 3)  
Disk 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-23  
PCI Board  
The server is equipped with five slots for installing PCI boards.  
IMPORTANT:  
Any PCI board is easily affected by static electricity. Handle a PCI  
board after making your body contact with a metallic frame section  
of the server to discharge the static electricity on your body. Do not  
make bare hands contact with terminals and components on the PCI  
board. In addition, do not put the PCI board on a desk directly. See  
"Static Precautions" in this chapter for details of the static  
electricity.  
The long-sized board (full-length board) can be installed only to the  
PCI slot #2. Care must be taken to avoid damage to the components  
on the mother board when installing the long-sized board.  
PCI board slot #1  
PCI board slot #2  
PCI board slot #3  
PCI board slot #4  
PCI board slot #5  
Mother board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-24 Upgrading Your Server  
Slots to install the PCI board  
SAS Model  
Slot  
Slot  
Slot  
Slot  
Slot  
(Bus A) (Bus B) (Bus C) (Bus D) (Bus E)  
Product name  
PCIe #1 PCI-X #2 PCIe #3 PCIe #4 PCI #5  
64 bit/  
100MHz  
32 bit/  
32MHz  
PCI slot capability*1  
N code  
x4 lane  
x8 lane x1 lane  
Full-height  
Note  
Slot size  
x4  
socket  
x8  
socket  
x4  
socket  
PCI board type*1  
3.3V  
5V  
Available board size  
Short  
Long/short  
2 max.  
SCSI controller  
N8103-95  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
2 max.  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
(64-bit/66MHz PCI)  
SCSI controller  
N8103-75  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
2 max.  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
For connection with SATA  
disk array  
SCSI controller  
N8103-126  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
Disk array controller for  
N8103-104 onboard SAS  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
Disk array controller for  
N8103-105 onboard SAS  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
1 max.  
among N8103-  
91/101/103/104/105  
Disk array controller for  
1 max.  
3 max. with N8103-80.  
N8103-91  
onboard SAS  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
1 max.  
Disk array controller for  
external SAS  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
3 max. with N8103-80/90/99.  
N8103-90  
N8103-99  
N8103-80  
Disk array controller (0 ch)  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
1 max.  
1 max.  
Disk array controller (1 ch)  
(64-bit/66MHz PCI)  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
3 max. with N8103-90/81/99.  
100BASE-TX adapter  
(32-bit/33MHz PCI)  
100BASE-TX adapter  
(32-bit/33MHz PCI)  
1000BASE-T adapter  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8104-111  
N8104-86  
N8104-119  
2 max.  
2 max.  
1 max. per PCI bus (2 max.  
per PCI bus with AFT)  
N8104-120: 2 max. per  
system  
Cannot co-exist with N8104-  
112.  
1000BASE-T adapter (2 ch)  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8104-120  
2 max.  
1000BASE-T adapter  
(PCI EXPRESS (x1))  
N8104-114  
N8104-121  
Teaming with another N8104-  
114 is allowed.  
1000BASE-T adapter (2ch)  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
2 max.  
1 max. per PCI bus (2 max.  
per PCI bus with AFT)  
Cannot co-exist with N8104-  
103/113.  
1000BASE-SX adapter  
(2ch)  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8104-112  
10GBASE-SR adapter  
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))  
Graphics accelerator  
(32-bit/33MHz PCI)  
Additional RS232C  
connector kit  
N8104-123A  
N8105-45  
1 max.  
1 max.  
1 max.  
N8117-01A  
: Available, –: Unavailable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-25  
SATA Model  
Slot  
Slot  
Slot  
Slot  
Slot  
(Bus A) (Bus B) (Bus C) (Bus D) (Bus E)  
Product name  
PCIe #1 PCI-X #2 PCIe #3 PCIe #4 PCI #5  
64 bit/  
100MHz  
32 bit/  
32MHz  
PCI slot capability*1  
Slot size  
x4 lane  
x8 lane x1 lane  
Full-height  
N code  
Note  
x4  
socket  
x8  
socket  
x4  
socket  
PCI board type*1  
3.3V  
5V  
Available board size  
Short  
Long/short  
2 max.  
SCSI controller  
(64-bit/66MHz PCI)  
N8103-95  
N8103-75  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
2 max.  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
2 max.  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
For connection with SATA  
disk array  
SCSI controller  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
SCSI controller  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8103-126  
N8103-101  
Disk array controller  
(SATA2)  
1 max.  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
Disk array controller  
(SATA2)  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
Additional battery for  
N8103-101  
N8103-103  
N8103-102  
1 max.  
1 max.  
1 max.  
Disk array controller (1 ch)  
(64-bit/66MHz PCI)  
Cannot connect with internal  
hard disk drive.  
N8103-80  
2 max. with N8103-81/86  
100BASE-TX adapter  
(32-bit/33MHz PCI)  
100BASE-TX adapter  
(32-bit/33MHz PCI)  
1000BASE-T adapter  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8104-111  
N8104-86  
N8104-119  
2 max.  
2 max.  
1 max. per PCI bus (2 max.  
per PCI bus with AFT)  
N8104-120: 2 max. per  
system  
Cannot co-exist with N8104-  
112.  
1000BASE-T adapter (2 ch)  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8104-120  
2 max.  
1000BASE-T adapter  
(PCI EXPRESS (x1))  
N8104-114  
N8104-121  
Teaming with another N8104-  
114 is allowed.  
1000BASE-T adapter (2ch)  
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))  
2 max.  
1 max. per PCI bus (2 max.  
per PCI bus with AFT)  
Cannot co-exist with N8104-  
103/113.  
1000BASE-SX adapter  
(2ch)  
(64-bit/133MHz PCI-X)  
N8104-112  
10GBASE-SR adapter  
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))  
Graphics accelerator  
(32-bit/33MHz PCI)  
Additional RS232C  
connector kit  
N8104-123A  
N8105-45  
1 max.  
1 max.  
1 max.  
N8117-01A  
: Available, –: Unavailable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-26 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation Considerations for RAID Controller  
Described below must be considered when installing any of the RAID controller listed below. For  
details, refer to the manual that comes with the RAID controller.  
– N8103-101 SATA2 Disk array controller  
– N8103-105 SAS Disk array controller  
– N8103-91 Disk array controller  
– N8103-99 Disk array controller (0ch)  
Prepare the hard disk drives and cables appropriate to RAID controller to be installed.  
Configure the Logical Settings of hard disk drive.  
Prepare the number of hard disk drives required for desired RAID (Redundant Array of  
Inexpensive [Independent] Disks) level.  
Making hard disk drives in the disk array configuration or changing the RAID level  
initializes hard disk drives. If the hard disk drive to be configured in the array has your  
valuable data stored, make sure to make a backup copy of the data in another hard disk  
drive before installing the disk array controller board and configuring the array.  
Use hard disk drives of the same capacity and revolution for each pack to configure them  
in the array.  
The disk array configuration improves disk reliability but provides a smaller disk capacity  
than the total capacity of hard disk drives in the disk array configuration.  
When the disk array controller board is replaced, restore the disk array configuration  
information in the disk array controller board. Use the configuration utility for the  
restoration. Chapter 6 for details.  
To indicate the access status of each hard disk drive connected to the RAID controller  
with the DISK ACCESS lamp on the front panel of the server, use the LED cable that  
comes with your server.  
– With N8103-101/105 disk array controller, connect the LED cable to the LED  
connector on mother board and that on the RAID controller.  
– With N8103-91 disk array controller, connect the LED cable to the LED connector on  
the mother board and that on the N8154-11 additional HDD cage.  
Refer to the manual that comes with your RAID controller for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-27  
To mother board  
Face this side to top  
of the server, and  
connect black cable  
pin only.  
To option board  
or  
additional HDD cage  
Mother board  
<Before connection>  
LED connector  
<After connection>  
LED connector  
Red  
Black cable  
Black  
Black  
Red  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-28 Upgrading Your Server  
N8103-101  
Black cable  
Black  
Red cable  
Red  
N8103-105  
Red cable  
Red  
Black cable  
Black  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-29  
N8154-11 Additional HDD Cage  
Black cable  
Black  
Red cable  
Red  
Additional HDD cage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-30 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation  
Install the board to be connected to the PCI board slot depending on the following procedure. Refer  
to the manual provided with the board.  
1. Before the installation, set the switches and jumpers on the installed board appropriately  
referring to the manual provided with the board, if necessary.  
2. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
3. Remove the left side cover.  
4. Remove the additional slot cover at the same location (height) as the installation slot.  
IMPORTANT: Store the removed slot cover for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-31  
5. Make the component side of the board face the bottom of the server, put the rear panel of  
the board on the frame spring securely, and push the board fully so that the board  
connection port is certainly connected to the slot.  
For a long-sized board, align the board with the groove of the guide rail on the front of the  
server and then connect the board to the slot.  
IMPORTANT: If the board cannot be installed well, remove the board  
once and then install it again. Note that adding an excess force to the  
board may cause it to be damaged.  
PCI guide rail  
Grooves for guide rail  
Frame spring portion  
<Long-sized board>  
6. Assemble the server.  
7. Turn on the power of the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.  
If an error message appears, write down the message and contact your service  
representative for the maintenance.  
8. Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the "Advanced"  
menu to "Yes."  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-32 Upgrading Your Server  
Setting after installation  
Depending on the type of the installed board, some settings of the server must be modified by using  
the proper utility (such as the BIOS Setup Utility or the setup utility installed in the board) after the  
installation.  
Provide the settings correctly according to the information described in the manual provided with  
the board.  
The server scans the PCI bus numbers in the ascending order after the power-on. If the BIOS utility  
is stored in the optional ROM mounted on the board, the PCI bus start messages (banners) appear in  
the ascending order of the PCI bus numbers.  
Removal  
Remove the board from the PCI board slot in the following procedure.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the left side cover.  
3. Remove the board.  
4. Assemble the server.  
5. Turn on the power of the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.  
If an error message appears, write down the message and contact your service  
representative for the maintenance.  
6. Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the "Advanced"  
menu to "Yes."  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-33  
DIMM  
The DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) is installed in a DIMM socket on the mother board  
installed in the server.  
Up to 24GB (4GB × 6) of memory can be added.  
IMPORTANT:  
The DIMM is easily affected by static electricity. Handle the DIMM  
after making your body contact with a metallic frame section of the  
server to discharge the static electricity on your body. Do not make  
bare hands contact with terminals and components on the DIMM. In  
addition, do not put the DIMM on a desk directly. See "Static  
Precautions" for details of the static electricity.  
Do not use any DIMM not approved by NEC. If an unapproved  
third party's DIMM is installed in the server, not only the DIMM but  
also the server itself may be defected. You will be charged by any  
repair of a malfunction or defect caused by such a device within the  
warranty period.  
DIMM #B-3  
DIMM #B-2  
DIMM #B-1  
DIMM #A-3  
DIMM #A-2  
DIMM #A-1  
REAR  
FRONT  
Mother board  
The mother board in your server supports the dual channel memory configuration.  
The dual channel memory configuration increases data transfer rate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-34 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation Order and Notes  
The following table shows the installation order.  
Condition  
DIMM numbers  
Minimum installation  
When added one pair  
When added two pairs  
DIMM #A-1 and DIMM #B-1  
DIMM #A-2 and DIMM #B-2  
DIMM #A-3 and DIMM #B-3  
DIMM Installation Pattern for Using Online Spare Memory Feature  
To enable online spare memory feature, DIMMs in memory controller must be the same capacities  
and type. Depending on specification of memory controller, the spare memory is set in unit of rank  
memory.  
The logical memory capacity of single rank memory differs from that of dual rank memory when  
online spare memory is specified.  
Single rank memory configuration  
(Physical memory capacity * Number of DIMMs) – Physical memory capacity  
= Logical memory capacity  
Dual rank memory configuration  
(Physical memory capacity * Number of DIMMs) – (Physical memory capacity / 2)  
= Logical memory capacity  
The server supports the following DIMMs  
N8102-250 Additional 1-GB memory: Single rank  
N8102-251 Additional 2-GB memory: Dual rank  
N8102-252 Additional 4-GB memory: Dual rank  
The use the online spare memory feature, install DIMMs according to the table shown below. (To  
enable the online spare memory, BIOS setting is required (see Chapter 4).)  
Installation Pattern in Memory Controller 0  
Group #1  
Group #2  
Group #3  
Total capacity of Total capacity of  
DIMM #A1, #B1  
DIMM #A1, #B1  
DIMM #A1, #B1 physical memory logical memory  
Pattern 1 Standard 1GB Additional 1GB  
Pattern 2 Standard 1GB Additional 1GB Additional 1GB  
Pattern 3 Additional 2GB Additional 2GB  
Pattern 4 Additional 2GB Additional 2GB Additional 2GB  
Pattern 5 Additional 4GB Additional 4GB  
Pattern 6 Additional 4GB Additional 4GB Additional 4GB  
2GB  
3GB  
4GB  
6GB  
8GB  
12GB  
1GB  
2GB  
3GB  
5GB  
6GB  
10GB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-35  
Memory Controller 0  
Group#1  
Group#2  
Group#3  
Each group has must have  
the same capacity  
The memory group farthest from the memory controller is specified as spare memory.  
NOTES:  
If both Group #1 and Group #2 contain DIMMs, the Group #2 is  
specified as spare memory.  
If all groups contain DIMMs, the Group #3 is specified as spare  
memory.  
You may install DIMMs in the memory controller 1 in the similar way as the memory  
controller 0.  
The capacity of physical/logical memory is calculated for each controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-36 Upgrading Your Server  
Installation  
Install a DIMM in the following procedure.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the left side cover as described earlier in this chapter.  
3. Firmly hold the server with your both hands so that its left side faces upward, and bring it  
down slowly and gently.  
4. Remove the cooling fan.  
5. Open the levers at both ends of the socket.  
6. Push the DIMM to the socket straight.  
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of DIMM. The terminal side of  
the DIMM has key and key slot to prevent incorrect insertion.  
IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying  
too much pressure can damage the socket.  
If the DIMM is inserted into the DIMM socket, the lever is automatically closed.  
7. Close the levers securely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-37  
8. Assemble the server.  
9. Turn on the power of the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 8.  
10. Run the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] [Memory Configuration] to verify that  
the installed DIMM shows the status "Normal". (See Chapter 4 for details.)  
11. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
12. If Windows Server 2003 is in use, set the paging file size to the recommended value or a  
greater value. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-38 Upgrading Your Server  
Removal  
Remove the DIMM depending on the following procedure.  
NOTES:  
To remove the defected DIMM, check the error message appearing  
in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket (group) in  
which the defected DIMM is installed.  
The server needs at least two DIMMs installed to operate.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Open the levers at the both ends of the socket for the DIMM to be removed.  
The lock is released to allow the DIMM to be removed.  
3. Remove the DIMM.  
4. Assemble the server.  
5. Turn on the power of the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 8.  
6. Run the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] [Memory Configuration] [Memory  
Retest] [Enabled] to clear the error information of the removed DIMM. (See Chapter 4  
for details.)  
7. Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
8. If Windows Server 2003 is in use, set the paging file size to the recommended value or a  
greater value. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-39  
Installation of Duct  
When installing additional 4-GB or 8-GB DIMM, an optional duct must be installed.  
Take the following steps to install a duct.  
1. Remove the fan.  
2. Remove the set screw from the fan guard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-40 Upgrading Your Server  
3. Fix the duct support bracket to the fan guard with two screws (a screw removed in Step 2  
and a screw for fixing the fan guard coming with the additional DIMM).  
Duct support bracket  
4. Fix the duct to the duct support bracket with metric screws coming with the DIMM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-41  
Use three screws as shown in the figure below.  
5. Reinstall the fan in the same location as before.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-42 Upgrading Your Server  
Processor (CPU)  
The server may have another CPU installed in addition to the factory-installed CPU (IntelXeon  
Processor).  
IMPORTANT:  
The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to  
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity  
from your body before handling the CPU. Do not touch the CPU  
pins by a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk. For static  
notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
Do not operate the system until confirming that the additionally  
installed CPU is in normal state.  
Make sure to use the CPU authorized by NEC. Installing a third-  
party CPU may cause a failure of the CPU as well as the mother  
board. Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from  
installing such a board will be charged.  
Connector for CPU#1 fan  
CPU #1  
CPU #2  
Connector for  
CPU#2 fan  
FRONT  
REAR  
Mother board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-43  
Installation  
Take the following steps to install the CPU.  
NOTE: With the server of SAS model, screws securing the heat sink  
are hidden by the HDD cage. Remove the HDD cage before starting  
installation of CPU.  
HDD cage  
Heat sink  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the left side cover.  
3. Firmly hold the server with your both hands so that its left side faces upward, and bring it  
down slowly and gently.  
4. Remove the cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed cover for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-44 Upgrading Your Server  
5. Raise the lever on the socket.  
6. Raise the holder.  
7. Put the CPU on the socket slowly and carefully.  
IMPORTANT: Make sure of the orientation of CPU. A pin mark is  
placed on CPU and CPU socket to prevent an incorrect insertion. Check  
the pin marks on CPU and socket before inserting CPU into socket.  
Pin mark  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-45  
8. Push the CPU lightly to the socket, and push down the holder.  
9. Push down the lever to secure the CPU.  
10. Put the heat sink on CPU.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-46 Upgrading Your Server  
11. Fix the heat sink with four screws.  
Temporarily secure the four screws in the order as shown in the figure below. Then, secure  
them tightly.  
2
3
4
1
12. Make sure that the heat sink is level with the mother board.  
NOTES:  
If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and then install it again. If the  
CPU is not positioned correctly, it causes the heat sink not to be  
level.  
Do not move the secured heat sink.  
13. Set [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu to "Yes".  
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
14. If the CPUs are additionally installed to configure a multi-processor system, provide the  
following settings on Windows.  
Select [Device Manager] - [Computer] and check the driver. If the driver is "ACPI single  
processor PC", change it to "ACPI multi-processor PC". Restart the server according to  
the on-screen message, and update the system. See Chapter 5 for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-47  
Removal  
To remove the CPU, prepare for removal referring to steps 1 and 3 in the installation procedure and  
do the reverse procedure of steps 11 to 4. To remove the heat sink, first remove the screw, and  
slightly move the heat sink at a level, then remove the heat sink.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed.  
After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of  
the heat sink adhere to the CPU. To remove the heat sink from the  
CPU, first turn the heat sink to the left and right lightly to make sure  
that the heat sink can be apart from the CPU. Removing the heat  
sink with it adhering to the CPU may cause the CPU and/or socket  
to be damaged.  
Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed (or replaced).  
1. Start SETUP to select menus [Main] – [Processor Settings] – [Processor Retest] in the  
order to clear the error information on the removed CPU (see Chapter 4).  
When a CPU is replaced, select menus [Main] – [Processor Settings] to confirm that the  
ID and L2 Cache Size of the additional CPU are defined normally (see Chapter 4).  
2. Set [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu to [Yes].  
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-48 Upgrading Your Server  
File Device  
The server has two slots on which backup devices including DVD-RAM, MO, and magnetic tape  
drives are installed (the factory-installed DVD-ROM drive occupies another slot).  
NOTES:  
If a SCSI device is installed, the optional SCSI controller board and  
internal SCSI cable are required. See Chapter 10 for details.  
To install an optional IDE device, move the DVD-ROM drive to  
additional slot 1. Then, install the IDE device instead.  
Factory-installed DVD-ROM drive: master (factory default)  
Optional IDE device: slave  
Additional  
slot 2  
5.25-inch  
Additional  
device bay  
slot 1  
File bay  
DVD-ROM  
drive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-49  
Installation  
Install a file device in the following procedure. Explanations are for factory-installed file bay.  
Explanation specific for hard disk drive installing kit is also described.  
SCSI Device  
1. Provide the proper setting for the device.  
See the table below for the settings of the devices which can be installed in the device bay.  
Device  
Setting  
SCSI device  
Termination resistance: OFF*  
*
If the terminator is not connected to the optional internal SCSI cable, set the termination  
resistance to ON.  
IMPORTANT: SCSI ID for the device you are installing must be  
unique.  
2. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
3. Remove the left side cover and front mask as described earlier in this chapter.  
NOTE: If you are going to install the hard disk drive device bay  
conversion kit, remove the dummy cover from the additional slot 2.  
4. Remove the two screws securing the dummy cover of the additional slot 1.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed dummy cover for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-50 Upgrading Your Server  
5. Secure the device to be installed to the rail with two screws provided with the device.  
6. Slowly insert the device into additional slot 1 with the release tabs on both sides of the file  
bay pushed.  
Push the file bay until a click occurs to lock it.  
7. Connect the interface and power cables to the 5.25-inch device installed from one side of  
the server.  
See Chapter 10 for details.  
8. Assemble the server.  
9. Set the parameters including the transfer rate using the BIOS utility of the SCSI controller.  
Refer to the manual provided with the SCSI controller for details.  
10. Install the device driver for the installed device.  
Refer to the manual provided with the device for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-51  
IDE Device  
1. Provide the proper setting for the device.  
See the table below for the settings of the devices which can be installed in the device bay.  
Device  
Setting  
IDE device  
Termination resistance: OFF  
2. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
3. Remove the left side cover and front mask as described earlier in this chapter.  
4. Remove all the cables from the factory-installed DVD-ROM drive and the devices  
installed in the device bay.  
5. Remove the factory-installed DVD-ROM drive with the release tabs on the both sides of  
the drive pushed.  
6. Secure the device to be installed to the rail with two screws provided with the device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-52 Upgrading Your Server  
7. Slowly insert the device into the slot from where the DVD-ROM drive has been removed  
with the release table on both sides of the device.  
Push the device until a click occurs to lock it.  
8. Remove the two screws from dummy cover of the additional slot 1 to remove the dummy  
cover.  
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed dummy cover for future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-53  
9. Slowly insert the DVD-ROM drive into additional slot 1 with the release tabs on both  
sides of the drive.  
Push the drive until a click occurs to lock it.  
10. Connect the interface and power cables to the 5.25-inch device installed from one side of  
the server.  
See Chapter 10 for details.  
11. Assemble the server.  
12. Set the parameters including the transfer rate using the BIOS utility of the IDE controller.  
Refer to the manual provided with the IDE controller for details.  
13. Install the device driver for the installed device.  
Refer to the manual provided with the device for details.  
Removal  
The file device can be removed in the reverse order of the installation. If the device is removed but  
not installed again, install the dummy cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-54 Upgrading Your Server  
Additional HDD Cage  
The N8154-09 additional HDD cage (called HDD cage) is dedicated to the server. It can contain  
four SATA hard disk drives to configure a disk array. The hard disk drives can be removed or  
replaced with the server being powered on (hot-swap feature).  
Installation  
Install the HDD cage in the following procedure.  
1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.  
2. Remove the left side cover according to the section "Front Mask" described earlier in this  
chapter and open the front mask.  
3. Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the hard disk drive if connected.  
4. Remove two screws on the front panel securing the hard disk drive carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-55  
5. Hold the lever and pull out the hard disk drive carrier.  
6. Pull out the remaining three hard disk drive carrier in the same manner.  
7. Hold the HDD cage and insert it slowly into the server as shown in the figure below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-56 Upgrading Your Server  
8. Secure the HDD cage to the server with four screws removed in steps 4 to 6.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully keep the removed drive carriers or screws  
for future use.  
NOTE: The location of screw holes depends on the cage. Install the  
HDD cage properly according to the figure.  
9. Close the front mask.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-57  
10. Fold the four stabilizers at the bottom of the server toward inside.  
11. Lay the server so that its right cover faces the floor.  
Lay the server slowly and gently.  
12. Make sure that the disk array controller is installed in the server. If not, install it.  
NOTE: See Chapter 5 for installing the disk array controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-58 Upgrading Your Server  
13. Connect the SATA cable provided with the HDD cage, I2C cable, and power cable as  
shown in the figure below.  
SATA cable  
Power cable  
(4-pin connector)  
I2C cable  
(4-pin connector)  
14. Connect the SATA cable to the RAID board (SATA).  
A label indicating a channel number of destination port is attached to SATA cable.  
Connect the SATA cable to the port (connector) having the same number as that of SATA  
cable.  
NOTE: The figure below shows an example when connecting to  
N8103-101 RAID board. The location of connector and assignment of  
channel numbers depend on the board. Refer to the manual that comes  
with your board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Your Server 9-59  
15. Install the left side cover.  
16. Raise the server and open the front mask.  
17. Install the hot-plug SATA hard disk drives in the HDD cage.  
Fully open the lever of the hard disk drive and insert the drive into the HDD cage until it  
hits the depth of HDD cage.  
After the hard disk drive is fully inserted into the cage, close the lever to fix the drive. (A  
click occurs when it is locked.)  
IMPORTANT: Use the hard disk drive that is authorized by NEC.  
Consult with your service representative for available hard disk drive.  
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the hard disk drive tray before  
inserting the drive. See the figure below. Also make sure that the hooks  
of the hard disk drive are engaged with the frame of the HDD cage.  
1
2
NOTE: The upper three slots of the HDD cage contain trays without  
hard disk drive. To install the hard disk drive, first remove the tray  
according to the removal procedure described later.  
Install a hard disk drive tray to the vacant slot of the cage to keep the  
cooling effect of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-60 Upgrading Your Server  
To remove the hard disk drive carrier, push the green tab on the lever and open the lever  
toward you until it stops. Then, the hard disk drive tray is unlocked.  
Securely hold the tray and the lever and insert the tray straight into the HDD cage.  
IMPORTANT: Removing more than one hard disk drive while the  
server is powered on destroys the logical disk. Remove or replace the  
hard disk drive one by one.  
18. Close the front mask.  
Removal  
The HDD cage can be removed in the reverse order of the installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10  
Internal Cabling Diagrams  
Internal cable connections of the server are shown below.  
NOTE: See Chapter 2 for detail connector locations on the mother  
board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-2 Internal Cabling Diagrams  
INTERFACE CABLES  
This section describes the connections of the interface cables.  
Addition of Hard Disk Drive  
The connection required when a hard disk drive is added is described below.  
Installation of SAS Disks  
If the SAS hard disk drives are added, connect the cables as shown in the figure below. Fill the drive  
bay with the hard disk drives from the bottom to top bay.  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
Fourth  
hard disk drive  
Third  
hard disk drive  
Second  
hard disk drive  
HDD cage  
First  
hard disk drive  
IDE cable  
SAS cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Cabling Diagrams 10-3  
Installation of SATA Disks  
If the serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drives are added, connect the cables as shown in the figure below.  
Fill the drive bay with the hard disk drives from the bottom to top bay.  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
Fourth hard disk drive  
Third hard disk drive  
Second hard disk drive  
First hard disk drive  
IDE cable  
SATA cable  
Installation of N8154-09 Additional HDD Cage in SATA Model Server  
If the N8154-09 Additional HDD Cage is added, connect the cables as shown in the figure below.  
Fill the drive bay with the hard disk drives from the bottom to top bay.  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
Fourth  
hard disk drive  
Third  
hard disk drive  
Second  
hard disk drive  
HDD cage  
First  
hard disk drive  
IDE cable  
K410-148 (00) cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-4 Internal Cabling Diagrams  
Connection of Disk Array Controller N8103-91 (SAS)  
If SAS hard disk drives are installed, the disk array controller (SAS) can be connected to the server.  
The internal hard disk drives can be subject to the disk array configuration. The supported RAID  
configuration includes RAID0 (striping), RAID1 (mirroring), and RAID5 (striping + parity). Hard  
disk drives having a different interface cannot be installed together. In addition, the disk array  
controller cannot be connected to disk expansion unit.  
RAID0 (striping)  
Stores data on two hard disk drives by dividing it (striping). Both hard disk drives can be  
accessed at the same time. This improves disk access performance compared with using a  
single hard disk.  
IMPORTANT:  
RAID0 does not have data redundancy. When a hard disk drive  
failure occurs, data cannot be restored.  
Logical capacity of the array becomes a multiple of the connected  
hard disk drive.  
RAID1 (mirroring)  
Stores the data being saved to one hard disk dive to another hard disk drive. This method  
is called "mirroring." When storing data onto one hard disk drive, the same data is  
simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive. When a hard disk drive becomes  
faulty, the one with the same data can be used. This provides operation without the system  
going down.  
IMPORTANT:  
RAID1 reads or writes data to/from the two hard disk drives at the  
same time. The disk access performance is lower than the single  
disk.  
Logical capacity of the array is equal to one hard disk drive  
connected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Cabling Diagrams 10-5  
RAID5 (striping + parity)  
Stores data onto four hard disk drives by dividing it (striping) in the same way as RAID0.  
With RAID5, parity (redundant data) is also divided and stored on four hard disk drives.  
Even if one of the configured hard disk drives becomes faulty, data can be used without  
any problem.  
IMPORTANT:  
Because data is read from or written to four hard disk drives  
concurrently, the disk access performance is lower than that of the  
configuration using only a single disk.  
Because the parity data is saved, the logical capacity is a little lower  
than the total capacity of the four hard disk drives.  
To build a disk array, at least two hard disk drives for RAID0 or RAID5, and at least three hard disk  
drives for RAID5 are required.  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
Disk array  
controller  
Fourth  
hard disk drive  
Third  
hard disk drive  
HDD cage  
Second  
hard disk drive  
First  
hard disk drive  
IDE  
LED connector  
IDE cable  
SAS cable  
Connect the LED cable provided with the server to the LED connector on the mother board and the  
disk array controller for indicating the hard disk drive access status.  
You can check the disk status (disk error or rebuilding of disk array) through the disk array  
management utility, MegaRAID Storage Manager, coming with the disk array controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-6 Internal Cabling Diagrams  
Connection of Disk Array Controller N8103-101 (SATA2)  
If serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drives are installed, the disk array controller (SATA2) can be  
connected to the server. The disk array controller (SATA2) is an optional PCI RAID board provided  
to improve the data reliability. It supports RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5.  
RAID0 (striping)  
Stores data on two hard disk drives by dividing it (striping). Both hard disk drives can be  
accessed at the same time. This improves disk access performance compared with using a  
single hard disk.  
IMPORTANT:  
RAID0 does not have data redundancy. When a hard disk drive  
failure occurs, data cannot be restored.  
Logical capacity of the array becomes a multiple of the connected  
hard disk drive.  
RAID1 (mirroring)  
Stores the data being saved to one hard disk dive to another hard disk drive. This method  
is called "mirroring." When storing data onto one hard disk drive, the same data is  
simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive. When a hard disk drive becomes  
faulty, the one with the same data can be used. This provides operation without the system  
going down.  
IMPORTANT:  
RAID1 reads or writes data to/from the two hard disk drives at the  
same time. The disk access performance is lower than the single  
disk.  
Logical capacity of the array is equal to one hard disk drive  
connected.  
RAID5 (striping + parity)  
Stores data onto three or more hard disk drives by dividing it (striping) in the same way as  
RAID0. With RAID5, parity (redundant data) is also divided and stored on four hard disk  
drives.  
Even if one of the configured hard disk drives becomes faulty, data can be used without  
any problem.  
IMPORTANT:  
Because data is read from or written to three or more hard disk  
drives concurrently, the disk access performance is lower than that  
of the configuration using only a single disk.  
Because the parity data is saved, the logical capacity is a little lower  
than the total capacity of the installed hard disk drives.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Cabling Diagrams 10-7  
To build a disk array, at least two hard disk drives are required. Use the SATA2 cables provided with  
the disk array controller (SATA2) for the connection. Remove the cables connected to the hard disk  
drives and save them for future use.  
IMPORTANT: Use hard disk drives with the same capacity and  
performance.  
Standard Configuration  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
Mother board  
DVD-ROM drive  
Disk array  
controller  
(SATA2)  
PCI #1, #3 or #4)  
Fourth hard disk drive  
Third hard disk drive  
Second hard disk drive  
First hard disk drive  
LED connector  
SATA2 cable  
IDE  
IDE cable  
When Using Additional HDD Cage  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
HDD cage (option)  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
Disk array  
controller  
(SATA2)  
PCI #1, #3 or #4)  
Fourth  
hard disk drive  
Third  
hard disk drive  
Second  
hard disk drive  
First  
hard disk drive  
LED connector  
SATA2 cable  
IDE  
IDE cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-8 Internal Cabling Diagrams  
To indicate the access status of the internal hard disk drives, connect the LED cable provided with  
the server to the LED connector on the mother board and the disk array controller (SATA).  
You can check the disk status (disk error or rebuilding of disk array) through the disk array  
management utility, Web-based Promise Array Manager, coming with the disk array controller  
(SATA).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Cabling Diagrams 10-9  
Connection of 5.25-inch Device  
The 5.25-inch device bay can be equipped with a SCSI device or an IDE device.  
Installation of SCSI Device  
The SCSI controller and the SCSI cable used for the connection is sold separately. If the SCSI cable  
sold separately (K410-68A(00)) has the connector for terminating the SCSI connection, set the  
termination setting of the 5.25-inch device to off.  
[SAS model]  
Power  
Terminator  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
SCSI device  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
SCSI  
controller  
Fourth  
hard disk drive  
Third  
hard disk drive  
HDD cage  
Second  
hard disk drive  
First  
hard disk drive  
IDE cable  
Terminator  
SCSI cable  
SAS cable  
[SATA model]  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
SCSI device  
DVD-ROM drive  
Mother board  
Fourth hard disk drive  
Third hard disk drive  
Second hard disk drive  
First hard disk drive  
SCSI controller  
SATA  
IDE  
IDE cable  
SCSI cable  
SATA cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-10 Internal Cabling Diagrams  
Installation of IDE Device  
Use the separately-priced IDE controller and the IDE cable for the connection.  
[SAS model]  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
DVD-ROM drive  
IDE device  
Mother board  
Fourth  
hard disk drive  
Third  
hard disk drive  
Second  
hard disk drive  
HDD cage  
First  
hard disk drive  
IDE cable  
SAS cable  
[SATA model]  
Power  
supply  
5.25-inch device bay  
DVD-ROM drive  
IDE device  
Mother board  
Fourth hard disk drive  
Third hard disk drive  
Second hard disk drive  
First hard disk drive  
IDE cable  
SATA cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Cabling Diagrams 10-11  
POWER CABLES  
An example of the power cable connection is shown in the figure below. The server only uses the  
power cables shown here.  
[SAS model]  
P9*  
Power  
Option device P8  
supply  
DVD-ROM drive  
P3  
P1  
Option device  
P4  
P12  
and  
P13  
P2  
HDD cage  
Mother board  
Power cable  
*: Unused connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-12 Internal Cabling Diagrams  
[SATA model]  
P9*  
Power  
supply  
Option device P8  
Option device  
P3  
P4  
DVD-ROM drive  
P1  
P2  
P10  
P11  
P12  
P13  
Mother board  
*: Unused connector  
Power cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
SATA2 Model (N8100-1235F/1236F/1321F/1322F)  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
Item  
Type  
N8100-1235F  
N8100-1236F  
N8100-1321F  
N8100-1322F  
CPU  
Dual-core IntelXeonProcessor  
Clock / Cache  
Number of processors  
Maximum  
1.6G/1066/4M  
3G/1333/4M  
2G/1066/4M  
2.33G/1333/4M  
1
2
Chipset  
Memory  
Intel Blackford-VS + ESB2E + ServerEngines Pilot  
1GB (512 MB × 2)  
Standard  
Maximum  
24 GB (4 GB × 6)  
Expansion unit  
Expansion times  
Memory module  
2 DIMMs (512MB×2/1GB×2/2GB×2/4GB×2)  
2 times  
DDR2-533/667 SDRAM DIMM (Fully Buffered Type), Dual channel  
memory configuration supported)  
Error check  
ECC, ChipKill, Sparing  
Matrox G200 + 2MB  
None  
Graphics (VRAM)  
Auxiliary  
Floppy disk drive  
input device (standard)  
Hard disk drive (standard) None  
Hard disk drive SATA2 (250GB x 4)  
(maximum)  
Hard disk drive (hot-plug) Optional  
Hot Plug SATA2 HDD x 4 with N8154-09F  
DVD-ROM (standard)  
5.25-inch file bay  
DVD-ROM x 1 (load on tray, x6 speed or faster)  
3 slots (A DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed.)  
3.5-inch disk bay  
Additional PCI slot  
1-inch height x4 (SATA2 fixed) (Can be changed to SATA2 HotPlug)  
5 slots (PCI Express (x8) x1, PCI Express (x4) x1, PCI Express (x1) x1,  
64-bit/100MHz PCI-X x1, 32-bit/33MHz PCI x1  
Disk array  
Standard  
On-board SATA SW RAID (0,1)  
Disk array controller  
Option  
Internal  
interface  
IDE (single unit)  
SATA (single unit)  
SATA (disk Array)  
SCSI (single unit)  
Ultra ATA100 x1ch  
SATA2 x6ch  
Supports N8103-101 (max. 1 )  
Option (for tape unit with N8103-75/95)  
SCSI (external Disk  
Array)  
Option (Supports N8103-80/81 (up to 2, SAS DAC (SW/HW) may be  
installed together)  
SAS (single unit)  
SAS (internal disk array)  
SAS (external disk array) Supports N8103-90 (up to 3 including N8103-91/99)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2 Specifications  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
N8100-1236F N8100-1321F  
Item  
N8100-1235F  
N8100-1322F  
External  
interface  
Front  
Rear  
USB2.0 x2  
VGA x1, KB (PS/2) x1, Mouse (PS/2) x1, Serial x1, USB2.0 x2,  
10/100/1000BASE-T x2, 10/100BASE-TX x1 (100BASE-TX is used for  
management)  
Cabinet design  
External dimensions  
Weight  
Mini tower  
198 (width) × 440 (height) × 518 (depth) mm  
16 kg (Max. 23 kg)  
Power supply  
100 to 120 Vac/200 to 240 Vac parallel bi-polar receptacle with the  
ground line  
Power consumption  
Switch  
550 VA, 545 W  
Power/Sleep (front), Dump (rear)  
Provided  
Security key  
LED  
Power/Sleep, HDD (front), LAN x3 (rear)  
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)  
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Environmental  
requirements  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications A-3  
SATA2 Model (N8100-1287F/1288F/1352F)  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
N8100-1288F  
Item  
N8100-1287F  
N8100-1352F  
3.0G/1333/4M  
CPU  
Type  
Dual-core IntelXeonProcessor  
Clock / Cache  
Number of processors  
Maximum  
1.6G/1066/4M  
2G/1333/4M  
1
2
Chipset  
Memory  
Intel Blackford-VS + ESB2E + ServerEngines Pilot  
1GB (512 MB × 2)  
Standard  
Maximum  
24 GB (4 GB × 6)  
Expansion unit  
Expansion times  
Memory module  
2 DIMMs (512MB×2/1GB×2/2GB×2/4GB×2)  
2 times  
DDR2-533/667 SDRAM DIMM (Fully Buffered Type), Dual channel  
memory configuration supported)  
Error check  
ECC, ChipKill, Sparing  
Matrox G200 + 2MB  
None  
Graphics (VRAM)  
Auxiliary  
Floppy disk drive  
input device (standard)  
Hard disk drive (standard) None  
Hard disk drive SATA2 (500GB x 4)  
(maximum)  
Hard disk drive (hot-plug) Optional  
Hot Plug SATA2 HDD x 4 with N8154-09F  
DVD-ROM (standard)  
5.25-inch file bay  
DVD-ROM x 1 (load on tray, x6 speed or faster)  
3 slots (A DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed.)  
3.5-inch disk bay  
Additional PCI slot  
1-inch height x4 (SATA2 fixed) (Can be changed to SATA HotPlug)  
5 slots (PCI Express (x8) x1, PCI Express (x4) x1, PCI Express (x1) x1,  
64-bit/100MHz PCI-X x1, 32-bit/33MHz PCI x1  
Disk array  
Standard  
On-board SATA SW RAID (0,1)  
Disk array controller  
Option  
Internal  
interface  
IDE (single unit)  
SATA (single unit)  
SATA (disk Array)  
SCSI (single unit)  
Ultra ATA100 x1ch  
SATA2 x6ch  
Supports N8103-101 (max. 1 )  
Option (for tape unit with N8103-75/95)  
SCSI (external Disk  
Array)  
Option (Supports N8103-80/81 (up to 2, SAS DAC (SW/HW) may be  
installed together)  
SAS (single unit)  
SAS (internal disk array)  
SAS (external disk array) Supports N8103-90 (up to 3 including N8103-91/99)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-4 Specifications  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
N8100-1288F  
Item  
N8100-1287F  
USB2.0 x2  
N8100-1352F  
External  
interface  
Front  
Rear  
VGA x1, KB (PS/2) x1, Mouse (PS/2) x1, Serial x1, USB2.0 x2,  
10/100/1000BASE-T x2, 10/100BASE-TX x1 (100BASE-TX is used for  
management)  
Cabinet design  
External dimensions  
Weight  
Mini tower  
198 (width) × 440 (height) × 518 (depth) mm  
16 kg (Max. 23 kg)  
Power supply  
100 to 120 Vac/200 to 240 Vac parallel bi-polar receptacle with the  
ground line  
Power consumption  
Switch  
550 VA, 545 W  
Power/Sleep (front), Dump (rear)  
Provided  
Security key  
LED  
Power/Sleep, HDD (front), LAN x3 (rear)  
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)  
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Environmental  
requirements  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications A-5  
SAS Model (N8100-1237F/1238F/1323F/1324F)  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
Item  
N8100-1237F  
N8100-1238F  
N8100-1323F  
N8100-1324F  
CPU  
Type  
Dual-core IntelXeonProcessor  
Clock / Cache  
Number of processors  
Maximum  
1.6G/1066/4M 3G/1333/4M  
1
2
2G/1066/4M  
2.33G/1066/4M  
Chipset  
Memory  
Intel Blackford-VS + ESB2E + ServerEngines Pilot  
1GB (512 MB × 2)  
Standard  
Maximum  
24 GB (4 GB × 6)  
Expansion unit  
Expansion times  
Memory module  
2 DIMMs (512MB×2/1GB×2/2GB×2/4GB×2)  
2 times  
DDR2-533/667 SDRAM DIMM (Fully Buffered Type), Dual channel  
memory configuration supported)  
Error check  
Graphics (VRAM)  
ECC, ChipKill, Sparing  
Matrox G200 + 2MB  
Auxiliary  
Floppy disk drive (standard) None  
input device  
Hard disk drive (standard)  
None  
Hard disk drive (maximum) SAS (146GB x 4)  
Hard disk drive (hot-plug)  
DVD-ROM (standard)  
5.25-inch file bay  
3.5-inch disk bay  
Additional PCI slot  
Hot Plug SAS HDD x 4  
DVD-ROM x 1 (load on tray, x6 speed or faster)  
3 slots (A DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed.)  
1-inch height x4 (SAS HotPlug)  
5 slots (PCI Express (x8) x1, PCI Express (x4) x1, PCI Express (x1)  
x1, 64-bit/100MHz PCI-X x1, 32-bit/33MHz PCI x1  
Disk array  
Standard  
On-board SAS SW RAID (0,1)  
Option  
Disk array controller  
Internal  
interface  
IDE (single unit)  
SATA (single unit)  
SATA (disk Array)  
SCSI (single unit)  
Ultra ATA100 x1ch  
Option (for tape unit with N8103-75/95)  
SCSI (external Disk Array) Option (Supports N8103-80/81 (up to 2, SAS DAC (SW/HW) may be  
installed together)  
SAS (single unit)  
SAS (internal Disk Array)  
SAS (external Disk Array)  
Front  
4i connector x1 + 2ch  
Supports N8103-91/99 (either one)  
Supports N8103-90 (up to 3 including N8103-91/99)  
USB2.0 x2  
VGA x1, KB (PS/2) x1, Mouse (PS/2) x1, Serial x1, USB2.0 x2,  
10/100/1000BASE-T x2, 10/100BASE-TX x1 (100BASE-TX is used  
for management)  
External  
interface  
Rear  
Cabinet design  
External dimensions  
Weight  
Mini tower  
198 (width) × 440 (height) × 518 (depth) mm  
16 kg (Max. 23 kg)  
Power supply  
100 to 120 Vac/200 to 240 Vac parallel bi-polar receptacle with the  
ground line  
Power consumption  
Switch  
Security key  
LED  
Environmental  
requirements  
550 VA, 545 W  
Power/Sleep (front), Dump (rear)  
Provided  
Power/Sleep, HDD (front), LAN x3 (rear)  
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)  
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-6 Specifications  
SAS Model (N8100-1290F/1291F/1293F)  
NEC Express5800/120Eh  
N8100-1291F  
Item  
N8100-1290F  
N8100-1293F  
3G/1066/4M  
CPU  
Type  
Dual-core IntelXeonProcessor  
Clock / Cache  
Number of processors  
Maximum  
1.6G/1066/4M  
2G/1066/4M  
1
2
Chipset  
Memory  
Intel Blackford-VS + ESB2E + ServerEngines Pilot  
1GB (512 MB × 2)  
Standard  
Maximum  
24 GB (4 GB × 6)  
Expansion unit  
Expansion times  
Memory module  
2 DIMMs (512MB×2/1GB×2/2GB×2/4GB×2)  
2 times  
DDR2-533/667 SDRAM DIMM (Fully Buffered Type), Dual channel  
memory configuration supported)  
Error check  
Graphics (VRAM)  
ECC, ChipKill, Sparing  
Matrox G200 + 2MB  
Auxiliary  
Floppy disk drive (standard) None  
input device  
Hard disk drive (standard)  
None  
Hard disk drive (maximum) SAS (300GB x 4)  
Hard disk drive (hot-plug)  
DVD-ROM (standard)  
5.25-inch file bay  
3.5-inch disk bay  
Additional PCI slot  
Hot Plug SAS HDD x 4  
DVD-ROM x 1 (load on tray, x6 speed or faster)  
3 slots (A DVD-ROM drive is factory-installed.)  
1-inch height x4 (SAS HotPlug)  
5 slots (PCI Express (x8) x1, PCI Express (x4) x1, PCI Express (x1)  
x1, 64-bit/100MHz PCI-X x1, 32-bit/33MHz PCI x1  
Disk array  
Standard  
On-board SAS SW RAID (0,1)  
Option  
Disk array controller  
Internal  
interface  
IDE (single unit)  
SATA (single unit)  
SATA (disk Array)  
SCSI (single unit)  
Ultra ATA100 x1ch  
Option (for tape unit with N8103-75/95)  
SCSI (external Disk Array) Option (Supports N8103-80/81 (up to 2, SAS DAC (SW/HW) may be  
installed together)  
SAS (single unit)  
SAS (internal Disk Array)  
SAS (external Disk Array)  
Front  
4i connector x1 + 2ch  
Supports N8103-91/99 (either one)  
Supports N8103-90 (up to 3 including N8103-91/99)  
USB2.0 x2  
VGA x1, KB (PS/2) x1, Mouse (PS/2) x1, Serial x1, USB2.0 x2,  
10/100/1000BASE-T x2, 10/100BASE-TX x1 (100BASE-TX is used  
for management)  
External  
interface  
Rear  
Cabinet design  
External dimensions  
Weight  
Mini tower  
198 (width) × 440 (height) × 518 (depth) mm  
16 kg (Max. 23 kg)  
Power supply  
100 to 120 Vac/200 to 240 Vac parallel bi-polar receptacle with the  
ground line  
Power consumption  
Switch  
Security key  
LED  
Environmental  
requirements  
550 VA, 545 W  
Power/Sleep (front), Dump (rear)  
Provided  
Power/Sleep, HDD (front), LAN x3 (rear)  
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)  
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Other Precautions  
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller  
The onboard network interface controller supports 10Base-T and 100Base-TX networks and a  
capable of full or half duplex.  
The controller can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected  
to the HUB. However, for proper network operation, specify the link speed and duplex mode to the  
same value as the value specified for HUB.  
Server Management Software  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO  
utility.  
NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability  
enhancement features of the server.  
Floppy Disk  
The following describes use of the floppy disk.  
Floppy disk type  
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy disks:  
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)  
Stores data of 1.44MB.  
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)  
Stores data of 720KB.  
Shutter  
Catching hole  
Insertion direction  
indicator  
Head window  
Centering hub  
Label  
Centering hole  
High-density media hole  
(2HD only)  
Write protection  
hole  
Write protection switch  
Front  
Rear  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2 Other Precautions  
Notes on use  
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep  
the following notes in mind to use it:  
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.  
Attach the label to the correct position.  
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.  
Do not open the shutter.  
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.  
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.  
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct  
sunlight or close to a heater).  
Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette  
smoke.  
Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a  
chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them.  
Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.  
Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.  
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Precautions B-3  
Write-protection  
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental  
erasure.  
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the  
floppy disk or format it. NEC recommends that you should write-protect any floppy disk  
containing valuable data unless you are about to save data.  
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.  
Disk format  
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to  
initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment (operating  
system).  
IMPORTANT:  
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if  
any.  
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not  
available with the server. Use a formatted floppy disk to work with  
it on the DOS command line.  
The format method depends on your operating system. Refer to the manual that comes  
with your operating system for details.  
Data backup  
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk,  
digital audio tape, or magnet-optical disk).  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy  
disk, if provided.  
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as  
operator's misconduct or sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, NEC  
recommends that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a regular  
basis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4 Other Precautions  
DVD/CD-ROM  
Keep the following notes in mind to use the DVD/CD-ROM for the server:  
Press the center of the storage case to remove the DVD/CD-ROM from the case.  
Do not drop the DVD/CD-ROM.  
Do not place anything on the DVD/CD-ROM or bend the DVD/CD-ROM.  
Do not attach any label onto the DVD/CD-ROM.  
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.  
Place the DVD/CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.  
Do not scratch the DVD/CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-  
point pen.  
Do not leave the DVD/CD-ROM with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette  
smoke.  
Do not leave the DVD/CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct  
sunlight or close to a heater).  
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the DVD/CD-ROM, wipe the DVD/CD-ROM  
from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.  
Use the dedicated cleaner to clean the DVD/CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner,  
benzene, or thinner.  
Keep the DVD/CD-ROM in the dedicated case when not in use.  
Tape Media  
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the  
server.  
Saving your valuable data  
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save  
them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.  
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as  
well as to protect your valuable data and programs from loss.  
Three-generation data management  
NEC recommends that you should employ three-generation data management for data  
storage.  
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save data  
to tape A on the first day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on the  
forth day, and so on. That is, you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A  
through C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Precautions B-5  
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read  
error. Also when both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable data  
by using the data stored in tape A.  
Keyboard  
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the  
keyboard. Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard.  
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of  
an angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to  
operate. The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders,  
arms, and fingers.  
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the  
manual that comes with the software for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6 Other Precautions  
Mouse  
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer. Many OS's and application  
software require the mouse for operation.  
NOTE:  
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the  
software. For details, refer to the manual provided with the  
software.  
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty  
desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse.  
When your mouse movement seems dull, clean your mouse. (See  
Chapter 7.)  
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."  
Click:  
Press the button only once and release it.  
Double-click:  
Drag:  
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.  
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.  
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the  
keyboard.  
Click  
Pressing  
Click  
Click  
Click  
Double-click  
Drag  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
IRQ and I/O Port Address  
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find an appropriate one to  
install an optional device.  
Interrupt Request  
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:  
IRQ  
0
Peripheral Device (Controller)  
System timer  
3
COM2  
4
COM1  
5
PCI  
8
Real-time clock  
9
APCI  
10  
11  
13  
14  
16  
24  
PCI  
BMC  
Numeric processor  
Primary IDE channel  
PCI  
PCI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2 IRQ and I/O Port Address  
I/O Port Address  
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:  
Address *1  
00 - 1F  
20 - 2D  
2E - 2F  
30 - 31  
34 - 35  
38 - 39  
3C - 3D  
40 - 43  
4E - 4F  
50 - 53  
61  
Chip in Use *2  
DMA controller  
Interrupt controller  
Super I/O configuration  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Timer controller  
Super I/O configuration  
Timer/counter  
NMI  
62  
LPC reserve  
63  
NMI  
70 - 77  
80 - 91  
92  
NMI/real-time clock  
DMA controller  
Port 92  
93 - 9F  
A0 - A1  
A4 - A5  
A8 - A9  
AC - AD  
B0 - B1  
B2 - B3  
B4 - B5  
B8 - B9  
BC - BD  
C0 - DF  
F0  
F1 - FF  
170 - 177  
1F0 - 1F7  
2F8 - 2FF  
376  
DMA controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Advanced power management  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
Interrupt controller  
DMA controller  
Coprocessor error  
Logic device configuration  
IDE secondary bus controller  
IDE primary bus controller  
Serial port 2  
IDE secondary bus controller  
Floppy disk drive 1  
IDE primary bus controller  
Interrupt controller  
BMC SMS interface  
BMC SMS interface  
PCI configuration address/reset control (CF9)  
PCI configuration data  
3F0 -3F5  
3F6  
4D0 -4D1  
CA2 - CA3  
CA4 - CA5  
CF8 - CFB  
CFC - CFF  
*1 Hexadecimal notation  
*2 I/O port address for PCI devices can be arbitrarily assigned according to the type and number of  
PCI devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your server supports the following optional  
boards;  
NOTE: If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy  
disk ("OEM-FD for Mass storage device"), except ones listed below,  
see "Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass storage device" and  
"Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette  
Creator" in Chapter 6.  
<SAS Hard Disk Model>  
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup  
– N8103-91 Disk Array Controller (Internal SAS HDD)*  
– N8103-99 Disk Array Controller(0ch)*  
– LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID(embedded on the mother board)  
Other controllers  
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)*  
– N8103-75 SCSI Controller*  
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller*  
<SATA Hard Disk Model>  
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup  
– N8103-101 Disk Array Controller (SATA2)*  
– LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID(embedded on the mother board)  
Other controllers  
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)*  
– N8103-75 SCSI Controller*  
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller*  
* Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Installing Service Pack  
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your system,  
prepare it by yourself.  
Updating System  
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in Master Control  
Menu.  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic  
Disk  
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to  
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:  
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS  
newly.  
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.  
Manual Installation when N8103-80F Keeps Connection  
If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process, pop-up messages may appear.  
This does not affect on system behavior. Click [YES] and continue the installation. Follow the  
message hereafter.  
Mounting MO Device  
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation.  
About Removable Media  
Do not set removable media, such as DAT, into the device mounted on your server during the OS  
installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-3  
Creating Partition Size  
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following  
formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size  
+ Application Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 4100MB  
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5  
Dump file Size  
Application Size  
= Mounted Memory Size + 1MB  
= Required Size  
IMPORTANT:  
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for  
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file with  
initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is  
required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to  
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set  
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.  
Regardless of the size of the mounted memory, or the Write  
debugging information (type of memory dump), the maximum size  
of the dump file is 'The size of the mounted memory + 1MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the  
above formula as follows:  
4100MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 1MB) + Application Size  
= 5381MB + Application Size  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve  
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to  
be written to a separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written,  
then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size",  
install an additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 X64 EDITIONS  
Preparations for Installation  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition (CD-ROM) / Microsoft  
Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition (CD-ROM)  
User's Guide  
Getting Started  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"  
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-  
DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server  
which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, you  
do not need to create it again.  
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with  
the following two procedures.  
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition  
OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.  
If Windows Server 2003 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server, you can use the  
other procedure described later.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server .(You may also  
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].  
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER]  
from [Create Support Disk] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-5  
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be  
created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
Create from [Master Control Menu]  
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.  
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
– Windows Server 2003  
– Windows Vista  
– Windows XP x64 Edition  
– Windows XP  
– Windows 2000  
– Windows Me/98/95  
– Windows NT 4.0  
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which  
the above operating systems operate.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Run the operating system.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Master Control Menu] will appear.  
4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition].  
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the  
Right-click.  
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be  
created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation  
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.  
1. Turn on the system power.  
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.  
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while  
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.  
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.  
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear.  
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.  
Begin after turning on the system power again.  
4. If the RAID controller or SCSI controller is installed in the system, press F6 in a few  
seconds when the window is in either of the following states.  
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.  
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has  
been pressed.  
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
into the floppy disk drive, and press Enter.  
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.  
Select the [LSI Logic Fusion-MPT SAS Driver (Server 2003 x64)] and press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-7  
7. Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– [LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 for x64)]  
(When N8103-91 board is installed.)  
– [LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 for x64)]  
(When N8103-99 board is installed.)  
– [Promise SuperTrak EX Series Controller-x64 platform]  
(When N8103-101 board is installed.)  
– [LSI MegaRAID Software RAID (Windows XP/2003 64-bit)]  
(When LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAIDis used.)  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.  
8. When the following message is shown, press Enter to start "Welcome to Setup".  
9. When the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition has finished, the system  
reboots automatically.  
10. The [Windows Setup] screen will be displayed after logged on to the system.  
IMPORTANT:  
In this case, the [Windows Setup] screen may not be displayed.  
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition  
DISC 2 according to the following procedures.  
You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition  
DISC 2 after the application of "System update".  
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition  
DISC 2.  
In this case, note that the [Windows Setup] screen is not displayed.  
11. Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM into the DVD-  
ROM drive.  
Confirm the parameters and click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-8 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
12. When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64  
Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the system.  
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver  
Installation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.  
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives  
This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical  
drives exist.  
Before Re-installing the Operation System  
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.  
Re-installing the Operation System  
1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.  
2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following  
message appears:  
The following list shows the existing partitions and  
unpartitioned space on this computer.  
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.  
*
Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper  
drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.  
3. Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this  
chapter.  
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.  
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for  
Modifying the Drive Letter".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-9  
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter  
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following  
procedure.  
1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start  
[Computer Management].  
2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.  
3. Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive  
Letter and Path...].  
4. Click [Yes].  
5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.  
6. Click [OK].  
7. If the following message appears, click [Yes].  
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no  
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?  
8.  
Close the [Computer Management].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-10 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Updating the System  
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.  
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member  
of the Administrators group.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen.  
3. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NEC Express5800 system]  
section.  
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.  
5. Click on [OK] to restart the system.  
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive  
immediately after clicking on [OK].  
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by  
adding or removing hardware or Operating system software  
components) or repair the system, you must run the system update  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-11  
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS  
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.  
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please  
refer to the document attached to the driver.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory.  
DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PROSET\WS3XPX64  
The [Intel® PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Complete" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-12 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)  
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter  
and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group  
when any trouble occurred on that adapter.  
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter  
and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters.  
This feature includes AFT feature.  
IMPORTANT:  
AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and  
restarting the system.  
All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist  
on the same LAN. If they are connected to the separate switches,  
they will not work normally.  
If you want to utilize AFT/ALB feature, follow the procedure below to setup.  
1. The [Intel (R) PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and click [Computer  
Management] and then double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in the Network  
Adapter list.  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [administrative tools].  
3. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in  
the Network Adapter list.  
2. Select [Teaming] tab and then check on [Team with other adapters]and click [New  
Team...].  
The [New Team Wizard] dialog box appears and click [Next].  
* Specify a name for the team if it necessary.  
3. Select the adapters to include in team.  
4. Select "Adapter Fault Tolerance" or "Adaptive Load Balancing" and click [Next].  
5. Click [Finish].  
6. The setup will go back to [Intel (R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box, so click  
[OK].  
7. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-13  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and  
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
IP addresses is not be able to set when the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box OFF.  
This phenomenon will occur with the certain condition.  
Check ON the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box and IP address will be able to set.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
1) Click Start menu, click [Control Panel], click [Network Connections], and click  
[Local Area Connection].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1) Click Start menu, click [Settings] and click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2) Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-14 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel(R) PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and click [Computer  
Management] and then double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in the Network  
Adapter list.  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [administrative tools].  
3. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in  
the Network Adapter list.  
2. Click the [Link] and specify the [Speed and Duplex] value the same as the value specified  
for HUB.  
3. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be  
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding  
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that  
the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This tool  
is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on how to  
install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described later in  
this chapter.  
Re-install the Network Driver  
The network driver will be installed automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-15  
Re-install the Optional Network Board Driver  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-112/119/111/86/120/121), the network driver  
will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be  
used.  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-86/111), install the driver stored in NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
In case of utilizing (N8104-86/111)  
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO100\WS3XPX64"  
In case of utilizing (N8104-112/119/120/121)  
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS3XPX64"  
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the  
section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".  
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver  
1. Start Device Manager.  
2. Click [Network adapters] and double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].  
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.  
NOTE: [(Intel (R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter. All  
other names show the Optional Network Board.  
3. Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard] appears.  
4. Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button and click  
[Next].  
5. Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the  
[Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.  
6. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [(N8104-  
86/111)], specify  
[DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO100\WS3XPX64].  
Then click [Next].  
When using [(N8104-112/119/120/121)], specify  
[DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS3XPX64].  
Then click [Next].  
7. Click [Finish].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-16 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
The graphics accelerator driver will be automatically installed by Express Setup or system update.  
NOTE: Please refer to the following <reinstalling> when the graphics  
accelerator driver is deleted, and reinstalled after OS is installed.  
<About the driver of graphics accelerator (N8105-45)>  
When graphics accelerator (N8105-45) board is installed or it separates, the deletion of the graphics  
accelerator driver which has already been installed is necessary.  
The procedure is as follows.  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Setting] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [Add/Remove Programs].  
3. Select the graphics accelerator driver from the program list and click "Change/Remove".  
To delete a standard graphics accelerator driver, select:  
[Matrox Graphics Software (remove only)]  
To delete a graphics accelerator (N8105-45) driver, select:  
[ATI Display Driver]  
NOTE: Please choose the graphics accelerator driver which has  
already been installed.  
4. Follow the message to continue the uninstallation and restart the system.  
5. Installing graphics accelerator driver.  
Manually installation:  
Make installation in the way of "Reinstallation of graphics accelerator driver"  
Automatic installation:  
You should execute the system update again referring to "Updating the system".  
End of installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-17  
<Reinstallation of graphics accelerator driver>  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "SETUP.EXE" which is in the following directory.  
To install a standard graphics accelerator driver:  
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\MATROX\SETUP.EXE.  
To install a graphics accelerator (N8105-45) driver:  
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\ES1000\SETUP.EXE.  
NOTE: Please choose one of above to be installed.  
4. Follow the message to continue the installation.  
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to  
continue.  
5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart  
the system.  
End of installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-18 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
Optional Network Board Driver  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-112/119/111/86/120/121), the network driver  
will be installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be  
used.  
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-86/111), install the driver stored in NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.  
In case of utilizing (N8104-86/111)  
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO100\WS03_32E"  
In case of utilizing (N8104-112/119/120/121)  
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS03_32E"  
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the  
section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".  
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver  
1. Start Device Manager.  
2. Click [Network adapters] and Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].  
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.  
NOTE: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter.  
All other names show the Optional Network Board.  
3. Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard] appears.  
4. Select the [Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)] radio button and click  
[Next].  
5. Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the  
[Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.  
6. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [(N8104-  
86/111)], specify  
[DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO100\WS03_32E].  
Then click [Next].  
When using [(N8104-112/119/120/121)], specify  
[DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS03_32E].  
Then click [Next].  
7. Click [Finish].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-19  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75)  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-75), update your system with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-95)  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (N8103-80F)  
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,  
connect the controller and take the following steps to install the driver:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools]  
[Computer Management].  
2. Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-1] which Device Manager lists.  
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search removable  
media [floppy, CD-ROM...]" check box.  
6. Insert "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"  
into the floppy disk drive, and click [Next].  
7. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard]  
dialog box below appears. Click [Finish].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-20 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
About Windows Activation  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003 x64  
Editions.  
Windows activation process is as follows.  
1. Click [Run] on [Start] menu.  
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].  
oobe/msoobe /a  
2. When the screen as follows is displayed, click [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D-21  
The following screen is displayed.  
3. Process "Windows activation" according to the following message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-22 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP  
(DEBUG INFORMATION)  
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
Installing Windows Server 2003  
This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003.  
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003  
Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2003.  
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your server supports the following optional  
boards;  
NOTE: If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy  
disk ("OEM-FD for Mass storage device"), except ones listed below,  
see "Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass storage device" and  
"Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette  
Creator" in Chapter 6.  
<SAS Hard Disk Model>  
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup  
– N8103-91 Disk Array Controller (Internal SAS HDD)*  
– N8103-99 Disk Array Controller(0ch)*  
– LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID(embedded on the mother board)  
Other controllers  
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)*  
– N8103-75 SCSI Controller*  
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller*  
<SATA Hard Disk Model>  
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup  
– N8103-101 Disk Array Controller (SATA2)*  
– LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID(embedded on the mother board)  
Other controllers  
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)*  
– N8103-75 SCSI Controller*  
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller*  
* Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Installing Service Pack  
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your system,  
prepare it by yourself.  
Updating System  
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in Master Control  
Menu.  
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic  
Disk  
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to  
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:  
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS  
newly.  
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.  
Manual Installation when N8103-80F Keeps Connection  
If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process, pop-up messages may appear.  
This does not affect on system behavior. Click [YES] and continue the installation. Follow the  
message hereafter.  
Mounting MO Device  
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation.  
About Removable Media  
Do not set removable media, such as DAT, into the device mounted on your server during the OS  
installation.  
Application of Service Pack  
When using Windows Server 2003 with this equipment, surely apply ServicePack 1. When  
installing Windows Server 2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-3  
Creating Partition Size  
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following  
formula.  
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size  
+ Application Size  
Size necessary to install the system = 3500MB (Windows Server 2003 R2)  
3500MB (Windows Server 2003 with Service  
Pack1)  
4400MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack1  
CD-ROM)  
Paging File Size (Recommended)  
Dump file Size  
Application Size  
= Mounted Memory Size * 1.5  
= Mounted Memory Size + 12MB  
= Required Size  
IMPORTANT:  
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for  
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file with  
initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is  
required.  
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to  
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set  
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.  
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is  
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify  
4095MB for the paging file size.  
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB  
memory mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.  
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary  
space to the partition to install these programs.  
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the  
above formula as follows:  
3500MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) + Application Size  
= 4792MB + Application Size  
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve  
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.  
1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".  
2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to  
be written to a separate disk.  
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written,  
then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size",  
install an additional new disk.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-4 Installing Windows Server 2003  
INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003  
Preparations for Installation  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM)/ Microsoft Windows  
Server 2003 Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM), Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard  
Edition (CD-ROM)/ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM)  
Windows Server 2003 Service Pack (CD-ROM)  
User's Guide  
Getting Started  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER"  
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server which you  
are going to install Windows Server 2003, you do not need to create it  
again.  
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the  
following two procedures.  
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK  
for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.  
If Windows Server 2003 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server, you can use the  
other procedure described later.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.  
4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server .(You may also  
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)  
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.  
5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-5  
6. Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create  
Support Disk] menu.  
7. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
Create from [Master Control Menu]  
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.  
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions  
– Windows Server 2003  
– Windows Vista  
– Windows XP x64 Edition  
– Windows XP  
– Windows 2000  
– Windows Me/98/95  
– Windows NT 4.0  
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from  
[Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operating systems  
operate.  
Follow the steps below.  
1. Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.  
2. Run the operating system.  
3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.  
[Master Control Menu] will appear.  
4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for  
Windows Server 2003].  
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the  
Right-click.  
5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.  
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.  
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-6 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation  
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.  
1. Turn on the system power.  
2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.  
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while  
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.  
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.  
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear.  
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.  
Begin after turning on the system power again.  
4. If the RAID controller or SCSI controller is installed in the system, press F6 in a few  
seconds when the window is in either of the following states.  
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.  
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.  
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has  
been pressed.  
5. When the following message is displayed, press S.  
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices  
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.  
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.  
The following message is displayed.  
Please insert the disk labeled  
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk  
into Drive A:  
*Press ENTER when ready.  
6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the  
floppy disk drive, and press Enter.  
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.  
Select the [LSI Logic Fusion-MPT SAS Driver (Server 2003 32-bit)] and press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-7  
7. Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.  
– [LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 32-bit)]  
(When N8103-91 board is installed.)  
– [LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 32-bit)]  
(When N8103-99 board is installed.)  
– [Promise SuperTrak EX8350/8300 Controller-Intel x86 platform]  
(When N8103-101 board is installed.)  
– [LSI MegaRAID Software RAID (Windows XP/2003)]  
(When LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAIDis used.)  
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.  
8. When the following message is shown, press Enter to start "Welcome to Setup".  
9. When the installation of Windows Server 2003 has finished, the system reboots  
automatically.  
– Windows Server 2003 has installed: Go on the step 13  
– Windows Server 2003 R2 has installed: Go on the step 10  
10. When Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed, the [Windows Setup] screen will be  
displayed after logged on to the system.  
IMPORTANT:  
In this case, the [Windows Setup] screen may not be displayed.  
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2  
according to the following procedures.  
You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after  
the application of "System update".  
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2.  
In this case, note that the [Windows Setup] screen is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-8 Installing Windows Server 2003  
11. Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
Confirm the parameters and click [OK].  
12. When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2  
CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the system.  
13. When the installation has completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver  
Installation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-9  
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives  
This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical  
drives exist.  
Before Re-installing the Operation System  
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.  
Re-installing the Operation System  
1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.  
2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following  
message appears:  
The following list shows the existing partitions and  
unpartitioned space on this computer.  
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.  
*
Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper  
drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.  
3. Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this  
chapter.  
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.  
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for  
Modifying the Drive Letter".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-10 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter  
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following  
procedure.  
1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start  
[Computer Management].  
2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.  
3. Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive  
Letter and Path...].  
4. Click [Yes].  
5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.  
6. Click [OK].  
7. If the following message appears, click [Yes].  
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no  
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?  
8.  
Close the [Computer Management].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-11  
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist  
[Before Re-installing the Operation System]  
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.  
[Re-installing the Operation System]  
1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.  
2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following  
message appears:  
The following list shows the existing partitions and  
unpartitioned space on this computer.  
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.  
* Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper drive  
letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.  
3. Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described in this manual.  
4. The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.  
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for  
Modifying the Drive Letter".  
[Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter]  
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following  
procedure.  
1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start [Computer  
Management].  
2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.  
3. Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive  
Letter and Path...].  
4. Click [Yes].  
5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.  
6. Click [OK].  
7. If the following message appears, click [Yes].  
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no  
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?  
8. Close the [Computer Management].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-12 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Updating the System  
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.  
1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member  
of the Administrators group.  
2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen.  
3. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NEC Express5800 system]  
section.  
4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.  
5. Click on [OK] to restart the system.  
6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive  
immediately after clicking on [OK].  
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by  
adding or removing hardware or Operating system software  
components) or repair the system, you must run the system update  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-13  
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS  
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.  
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please  
refer to the document attached to the driver.  
PROSet  
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.  
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:  
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.  
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.  
Setup of teaming.  
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any  
trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.  
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.  
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory.  
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PROSET\2KXPWS03  
The [Intel® PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.  
4. Click [Next].  
5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].  
6. Choose "Complete" and click [Next].  
7. Click [Install].  
8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].  
9. Restart the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-14 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Network Driver  
Specify the details of network driver.  
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and  
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.  
[When PROSet is not installed]  
1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click  
[Local Area Connection].  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].  
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.  
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.  
2. Click [Configure].  
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.  
3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value  
specified for HUB.  
4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.  
[When PROSet is installed]  
1. The [Intel(R) PROSet] dialog box appears.  
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu  
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel], [administrative tools], and click [Computer  
Management] and then double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in the Network  
Adapter list.  
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [administrative tools].  
3. Click [Computer Management] and double click the [(Network Adapter Name)] in  
the Network Adapter list.  
2. Click the [Link] and specify the [Speed and Duplex] value the same as the value specified  
for HUB.  
3. Click [Apply] and click [OK].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-15  
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.  
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be  
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].  
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding  
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that  
the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This tool  
is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on how to  
install the tool, see the "Setup for Trouble Process" later in this  
document.  
Re-install the Network Driver  
The network driver will be installed automatically.  
See "Optional Network Board Driver" in Chapter 5 for re-install the Optional Network Board  
Driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-16 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Graphics Accelerator Driver  
The graphics accelerator driver will be automatically installed by Express Setup or system update.  
NOTE: Please refer to the following < reinstalling > when the graphics  
accelerator driver is deleted, and reinstalled after OS is installed.  
<About the driver of graphics accelerator (N8105-45)>  
When graphics accelerator (N8105-45) board is installed or it separates, the deletion of the graphics  
accelerator driver which has already been installed is necessary.  
The procedure is as follows.  
1. Click Start menu, point to [Setting] and click [Control Panel].  
2. Click [Add/Remove Programs].  
3. Select the graphics accelerator driver from the program list and click "Change/Remove".  
To delete a standard graphics accelerator driver, select:  
[Matrox Graphics Software (remove only)]  
To delete a graphics accelerator (N8105-45) driver, select:  
[ATI Display Driver]  
NOTE: Please choose the graphics accelerator driver which has  
already been installed.  
4. Follow the message to continue the uninstallation and restart the system.  
5. Installing graphics accelerator driver.  
Manually installation:  
Make installation in the way of "Reinstallation of graphics accelerator driver"  
Automatic installation:  
You should execute the system update again referring to "Updating the system".  
End of installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-17  
<Reinstallation of graphics accelerator driver>  
1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.  
2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].  
3. Run "SETUP.EXE" which is in the following directory.  
To install a standard graphics accelerator driver:  
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\MATROX\SETUP.EXE.  
To install a graphics accelerator (N8105-45) driver:  
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\ES1000\SETUP.EXE.  
NOTE: Please choose one of above to be installed.  
4. Follow the message to continue the installation.  
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to  
continue.  
5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart  
the system.  
End of installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-18 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75/95)  
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-75/95), update your system with NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.  
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.  
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (N8103-80F)  
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the  
controller and take the following steps to install the driver:  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools]→  
[Computer Management].  
2. Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-1] which Device Manager lists.  
3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search removable  
media [floppy, CD-ROM...]" check box.  
6. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy  
disk drive, and click [Next].  
7. Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard]  
dialog box below appears. Click [Finish].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-19  
Notes of N8103-75  
After installing OS, the driver may not be installed depending on the method of installing OS  
occasionally.  
In that case, please install the driver by the following procedures.  
1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools]  
[Computer Management].  
2. Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device.  
3. Click [Update Driver].  
4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific  
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].  
5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].  
6. Click [Have Disk..].  
7. Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy  
disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].  
8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].  
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI ]  
The installation of the driver is completed.  
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-20 Installing Windows Server 2003  
About Windows Activation  
Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003.  
Windows activation process is as follows.  
NOTE: When you use Windows Server 2003 R2, activation process is  
not needed.  
1. Click [Run] on [Start] menu.  
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].  
oobe/msoobe /a  
2. When the screen as follows is displayed, click [Next].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-21  
The following screen is displayed.  
3. Process "Windows activation" according to the following message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-22 Installing Windows Server 2003  
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File  
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.  
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:  
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721  
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini  
files"  
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in  
Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.  
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.  
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.  
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 291988  
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension  
switch"  
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.  
1. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].  
2. In [Control Panel], double-click [System].  
3. Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].  
4. Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].  
5. Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.  
<Example of Boot.ini file>  
[boot loader]  
timeout=30  
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS  
[operating systems]  
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003" /fastdetect  
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, PAE" /fastdetect  
/PAE  
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons  
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.  
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating  
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you  
can make your system start automatically from the switch you  
specified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-23  
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP  
(DEBUG INFORMATION)  
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-24 Installing Windows Server 2003  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Product Configuration Record Table  
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.  
Hardware  
Main Unit  
Model name  
Clock  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
CPU  
#1  
Memory  
#1  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Size  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
Date Installed  
#2  
#3  
#4  
Monitor  
Type  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Hard Disk  
Bay #1  
Type  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Bay #2  
Bay #3  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Date Installed  
Hard Disk (optional SCSI controller installed)  
Bay #1 (ID0)  
Bay #2 (ID1)  
Bay #3 (ID2)  
Type  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Type  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Capacity  
Type number  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-2 Product Configuration Record Table  
5.25-inch Device  
Slot 1  
Size  
Capacity  
Serial No.  
Model name  
Type number  
Capacity  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Slot 2 (standard Size  
ATAPI DVD-  
Model name  
Type number  
Date Installed  
ROM drive)  
3.5-inch Device  
Slot 1 (standard Size  
1.44-MB floppy  
disk drive)  
Capacity  
Serial No.  
Model name  
Type number  
Date Installed  
Slot 2  
Size  
Capacity  
Serial No.  
Model name  
Type number  
Date Installed  
PCI Slot #1  
PCI Slot #2  
PCI Slot #3  
PCI Slot #4  
PCI Slot #5  
AGP Board Slot  
Printer  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Model name  
Manufacturer  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
Additional Cabinet for Disk  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Date Installed  
External Peripheral Device 1  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Date Installed  
External Peripheral Device 2  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Date Installed  
External Peripheral Device 3  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Date Installed  
External Peripheral Device 4  
Model name  
Serial No.  
Manufacturer  
Date Installed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product Configuration Record Table F-3  
Software  
Firmware version  
OS  
Name:  
Name:  
HPFS  
Version:  
Version:  
Application of RUR media  
File system  
Apply  
FAT  
NTFS  
Others (  
)
Bundled software installed  
Licensed software installed  
Application running when a failure  
occurred  
Remarks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-4 Product Configuration Record Table  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Mr Coffee Coffeemaker TF4 User Manual
Mr Handsfree Headphones blue compact User Manual
Napoleon Grills Gas Grill PRO 500 User Manual
NEC Computer Monitor MultiSync P750 User Manual
NEC Laptop Versa VX User Manual
NETGEAR Network Router WGE101 User Manual
Nextar Digital Photo Frame N7 203 User Manual
North Star Portable Generator M165923V1 User Manual
Opel Door Audi A3 Avant User Manual
Oregon Scientific Weather Radio WMR180 User Manual